WO2021037117A1 - 嵌入式冰箱 - Google Patents

嵌入式冰箱 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021037117A1
WO2021037117A1 PCT/CN2020/111633 CN2020111633W WO2021037117A1 WO 2021037117 A1 WO2021037117 A1 WO 2021037117A1 CN 2020111633 W CN2020111633 W CN 2020111633W WO 2021037117 A1 WO2021037117 A1 WO 2021037117A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
shaft
opening angle
door
door body
section
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/111633
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
朱小兵
夏恩品
李康
Original Assignee
青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司
海尔智家股份有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN201910803437.1A external-priority patent/CN112444073B/zh
Priority claimed from CN201910803425.9A external-priority patent/CN112444068B/zh
Priority claimed from CN201910803434.8A external-priority patent/CN112444072B/zh
Priority claimed from CN202010179561.8A external-priority patent/CN112444092B/zh
Priority claimed from CN202010637425.9A external-priority patent/CN113882769B/zh
Application filed by 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司, 海尔智家股份有限公司 filed Critical 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司
Priority to AU2020339538A priority Critical patent/AU2020339538B2/en
Priority to EP20856322.1A priority patent/EP4023975A4/en
Priority to US17/638,805 priority patent/US20220325940A1/en
Priority to JP2022513886A priority patent/JP2022546510A/ja
Publication of WO2021037117A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021037117A1/zh

Links

Images

Classifications

    • FMECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F25REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
    • F25DREFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • F25D23/00General constructional features
    • F25D23/02Doors; Covers
    • F25D23/028Details
    • EFIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E05LOCKS; KEYS; WINDOW OR DOOR FITTINGS; SAFES
    • E05DHINGES OR SUSPENSION DEVICES FOR DOORS, WINDOWS OR WINGS
    • E05D3/00Hinges with pins
    • E05D3/02Hinges with pins with one pin
    • E05D3/022Hinges with pins with one pin allowing an additional lateral movement, e.g. for sealing
    • EFIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E05LOCKS; KEYS; WINDOW OR DOOR FITTINGS; SAFES
    • E05DHINGES OR SUSPENSION DEVICES FOR DOORS, WINDOWS OR WINGS
    • E05D3/00Hinges with pins
    • E05D3/06Hinges with pins with two or more pins
    • E05D3/18Hinges with pins with two or more pins with sliding pins or guides
    • EFIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E05LOCKS; KEYS; WINDOW OR DOOR FITTINGS; SAFES
    • E05DHINGES OR SUSPENSION DEVICES FOR DOORS, WINDOWS OR WINGS
    • E05D7/00Hinges or pivots of special construction
    • E05D7/08Hinges or pivots of special construction for use in suspensions comprising two spigots placed at opposite edges of the wing, especially at the top and the bottom, e.g. trunnions
    • E05D7/082Hinges or pivots of special construction for use in suspensions comprising two spigots placed at opposite edges of the wing, especially at the top and the bottom, e.g. trunnions the pivot axis of the wing being situated at a considerable distance from the edges of the wing, e.g. for balanced wings
    • E05D7/084Hinges or pivots of special construction for use in suspensions comprising two spigots placed at opposite edges of the wing, especially at the top and the bottom, e.g. trunnions the pivot axis of the wing being situated at a considerable distance from the edges of the wing, e.g. for balanced wings with a movable pivot axis
    • EFIXED CONSTRUCTIONS
    • E05LOCKS; KEYS; WINDOW OR DOOR FITTINGS; SAFES
    • E05YINDEXING SCHEME ASSOCIATED WITH SUBCLASSES E05D AND E05F, RELATING TO CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS, ELECTRIC CONTROL, POWER SUPPLY, POWER SIGNAL OR TRANSMISSION, USER INTERFACES, MOUNTING OR COUPLING, DETAILS, ACCESSORIES, AUXILIARY OPERATIONS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR, APPLICATION THEREOF
    • E05Y2900/00Application of doors, windows, wings or fittings thereof
    • E05Y2900/30Application of doors, windows, wings or fittings thereof for domestic appliances
    • E05Y2900/31Application of doors, windows, wings or fittings thereof for domestic appliances for refrigerators
    • FMECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F25REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
    • F25DREFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • F25D2323/00General constructional features not provided for in other groups of this subclass
    • F25D2323/02Details of doors or covers not otherwise covered
    • F25D2323/021French doors
    • FMECHANICAL ENGINEERING; LIGHTING; HEATING; WEAPONS; BLASTING
    • F25REFRIGERATION OR COOLING; COMBINED HEATING AND REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS; HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS; MANUFACTURE OR STORAGE OF ICE; LIQUEFACTION SOLIDIFICATION OF GASES
    • F25DREFRIGERATORS; COLD ROOMS; ICE-BOXES; COOLING OR FREEZING APPARATUS NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • F25D2323/00General constructional features not provided for in other groups of this subclass
    • F25D2323/02Details of doors or covers not otherwise covered
    • F25D2323/024Door hinges

Definitions

  • the invention relates to the technical field of household appliances, and in particular to a built-in refrigerator.
  • the object of the present invention is to provide a built-in refrigerator, which can effectively improve the degree of freedom of opening and closing the door.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides an embedded refrigerator including a box body, a door body for opening and closing the box body, and a hinge assembly connecting the box body and the door body.
  • the box body includes a receiving cavity.
  • the hinge assembly includes a first hinge part, a second hinge part, and a switching assembly connecting the first hinge part and the second hinge part.
  • a first matching portion is provided on the door body, and a second matching portion is provided on the box body.
  • the first matching portion Interlocked with the second mating part, when the door body is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle, the door body rotates in situ relative to the box body to drive the first mating The part is separated from the second matching part.
  • the door body includes a first door body and a second door body that are pivotally connected to the box body and arranged side by side in a horizontal direction
  • the refrigerator also includes a first door body and a second door body movably connected to the first door body.
  • a door body is close to the vertical beam on the side of the second door body, the first matching portion is arranged at the vertical beam, and when the door body is in the closed state, the vertical beam extends to the second
  • the door body rotates in situ relative to the box body so that the vertical beam faces a position close to the accommodating chamber.
  • the first mating portion is a protrusion protruding upward from the vertical beam
  • the second mating portion is a groove with a gap
  • the protrusion passes through the gap Enter or exit the groove
  • the first hinge part is fixed to the box body
  • the second hinge part is fixed to the door body
  • the switching assembly includes a first matching part and a second matching part
  • the first hinge part is fixed to the box body
  • the second hinge part is fixed to the door body
  • the switching assembly includes a first matching part and a second matching part
  • the first hinge member and the first matching member move relative to each other to drive the door body to rotate in situ relative to the box body
  • the second matching member limits the second hinge member.
  • the second hinge member is separated from the first opening angle. The position of the two matching parts is limited, and the first matching part limits the first hinge part.
  • the second hinge When the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, the second hinge The relative movement of the second hinge member and the second matching member drives the door body to move from the pivoting side toward the accommodating chamber, and then the second hinge member and the second matching member move relative to each other to drive the door body to continue. ⁇ Rotating.
  • the switching assembly includes a first switching element and a second switching element that cooperate with each other.
  • first switching element and a second switching element that cooperate with each other.
  • the first switching element and the second switching element are relatively stationary, and when the door body is at a position that continues to open from the first opening angle to the second opening angle During the process, the first switching element moves relative to the second switching element so that the second hinge element is separated from the limit of the second matching element, and the first matching element limits the first Hinge pieces.
  • the first hinge member and the first matching member realize relative movement through the first shaft body group and the first groove body group that cooperate with each other, and the second hinge member The relative movement with the second matching member is achieved through the second shaft body group and the second groove body group that cooperate with each other.
  • the first shaft body group includes a first shaft body and a second shaft body.
  • the groove body group includes a first groove body matched with the first shaft body and a second groove body matched with the second shaft body
  • the second shaft body group includes a third shaft body and a fourth shaft body
  • the second groove body group includes a third groove body matched with the third shaft body and a fourth groove body matched with the fourth shaft body.
  • the first hinge member includes the first shaft body and the second shaft body
  • the first matching member includes the first groove body and the second groove
  • the second matching member includes the third shaft body and the fourth shaft body
  • the second hinge member includes the third groove body and the fourth groove body.
  • the first tank includes a first upper tank located on the first switching member and a first lower tank located on the second switching member, the first upper The trough body includes a first upper free section, the first lower trough body includes a first lower free section, the second trough body includes a second upper trough body located at the first switching member and a second upper trough located at the second switch
  • the first switching member and the second switching member are relatively stationary, the first upper free section and the first lower free section overlap to form a first free section, and the second upper free section is The second lower free section overlaps to form a second free section, the first shaft body moves in the first free section, the second shaft body moves in the second free section, and the third shaft body And/or the fourth shaft body is limited to the limit section so that the switching assembly limits the second hinge member, when the door body is at a position where the door body continues to open from the first opening angle to the second opening angle
  • the first switching element and the second switching element move relative to each other so that the fourth shaft body separates from the limiting section, and the first shaft body and/or the second shaft body Is limited to the locking section so that the switching assembly limits the first hinge member.
  • the third shaft body When moving in the third free section, the fourth shaft
  • the locking section includes a first upper locking section located in the first upper tank, a first lower locking section located in the first lower tank, and The second upper locking section of the second upper tank body and the second lower locking section located on the second lower tank body, the limiting section includes a fourth limiting section located on the fourth tank body,
  • the fourth shaft is limited to the fourth limiting section, and when the door is at the first opening angle, it continues to open to In the process of the second opening angle, the first shaft body is confined to the first upper locking section and the first lower locking section at the same time, and the second shaft body is confined to the second upper locking section at the same time.
  • the locking section and the second lower locking section, and the fourth shaft body is separated from the fourth limiting section.
  • first upper locking section and the first lower locking section are always mutually staggered, and the second upper locking section and the second lower locking section are always mutually offset. stagger.
  • the first free section includes an initial position and a stop position that are relatively set
  • the second free section includes a first section and a second section that are connected.
  • the box body includes an outer side surface adjacent to the hinge assembly and on the extension section of the door body rotation path
  • the door body includes a front wall away from the accommodating chamber and The side wall always sandwiched between the front wall and the containing chamber, there is a side edge between the front wall and the side wall, and between the center of the first shaft and the side edge Is the first distance, the second distance is between the center of the first shaft and the front wall, the third distance is between the center of the first shaft and the side wall, and the third shaft There is a fourth distance between the center of the body and the side edges, a fifth distance between the center of the third shaft and the front wall, and a fifth distance between the center of the third shaft and the side wall It is the sixth interval.
  • the first interval, the second interval, and the third interval are all kept unchanged and then reduced Small trend, when the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, the fourth distance, the fifth distance, and the sixth distance remain unchanged.
  • the third free section includes a relatively set starting position and a pivot position
  • the fourth free section includes a connected moving section and a rotating section.
  • the box body includes an outer side surface adjacent to the hinge assembly and on the extension section of the door body rotation path
  • the door body includes a front wall away from the accommodating chamber and The side wall always sandwiched between the front wall and the containing chamber, there is a side edge between the front wall and the side wall, and between the center of the first shaft and the side edge Is the first distance, the second distance is between the center of the first shaft and the front wall, the third distance is between the center of the first shaft and the side wall, and the third shaft There is a fourth distance between the center of the body and the side edges, a fifth distance between the center of the third shaft and the front wall, and a fifth distance between the center of the third shaft and the side wall Is the sixth interval.
  • the first interval, the second interval, and the third interval remain unchanged.
  • the fourth distance, the fifth distance, and the sixth distance all show a decreasing trend and then remain unchanged.
  • the first switching element and the second switching element are mated with each other through a fifth shaft body. During the process, the first shaft moves to the locking section with the fifth shaft as the center.
  • the first switching element is closer to the first hinge element than the second switching element.
  • the first switching member includes the third shaft body, the second switching member has a through hole, and the third shaft body extends to the through hole through the through hole.
  • the third groove body, the second switching member includes the fourth shaft body, and the fourth shaft body extends to the fourth groove body.
  • the box body includes an opening and a front end surface arranged around the opening, and there is a first distance between the first shaft body and the front end surface. In the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, there is a second distance between the third shaft body and the front end surface, and the second distance is greater than the first distance.
  • the refrigerator further includes an outer side surface adjacent to the hinge assembly and on the extension section of the door body rotation path, and there is a third distance between the first shaft body and the outer side surface, when When the door is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, there is a fourth distance between the third shaft and the outer side surface, and the fourth distance is smaller than the third distance .
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a built-in refrigerator, which is characterized by comprising a box body, a door body for opening and closing the box body, and a connection between the box body and the door.
  • a hinge assembly of a body, the box body includes a pivot side connecting the hinge assembly, an accommodation chamber, and a fixed beam that separates the accommodation chamber into a first compartment and a second compartment.
  • the door body includes A first door body corresponding to the first compartment and a second door body corresponding to the second compartment.
  • the hinge assembly includes a first hinge member fixed to the box body and fixed to the door
  • the second hinge part of the body and the switching assembly connecting the first hinge part and the second hinge part, the first hinge part and the switching assembly are mutually matched through the first shaft body group and the first
  • the groove body group realizes relative movement.
  • the first shaft body group includes a first shaft body and a second shaft body.
  • the first groove body group includes a first free section, a second free section and a locking section.
  • a free section includes an initial position and a stop position that are relatively set
  • the second free section includes a first section and a second section that are connected
  • the second hinge member and the switching assembly pass through a second shaft that cooperates with each other.
  • the body group and the second groove body group realize relative movement.
  • the second shaft body group includes a third shaft body and a fourth shaft body.
  • the second groove body group includes a third free section, a fourth free section and a limiter. Section, when the door is in the closed state, the first shaft is located at the initial position, the second shaft is located at the end of the first section away from the second section, and the fourth The shaft body is located in the limiting section so that the switching assembly limits the second hinge member.
  • the first door body and the second door body are both in contact with the fixed beam, and when the door body is in During the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle, the first shaft rotates in situ at the initial position, and the second shaft is centered on the first shaft.
  • the door body rotates in situ relative to the box, and then the second shaft moves in the second segment to drive the first shaft to move from the initial position to the stop Position, the door body moves from the accommodating chamber toward the pivoting side, and when the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the first opening angle to the second opening angle, the fourth shaft body leaves the limit position Section, and the first shaft body and/or the second shaft body are confined to the locking section so that the switching assembly constrains the first hinge member, when the door body is opened by the second
  • the third shaft rotates in situ in the third free section, and the fourth shaft is centered on the fourth shaft with the third shaft as the center.
  • the free section moves, the door body continues to rotate in situ relative to the box body.
  • the box body includes an outer side surface adjacent to the hinge assembly and on the extension section of the door body rotation path, and the door body includes a front wall away from the accommodating chamber and The side wall always sandwiched between the front wall and the accommodating chamber, there is a side edge between the front wall and the side wall, when the door is opened from the closed state to the first opening angle During the process, the side edge moves to the side of the outer side close to the containing chamber.
  • the first hinge member includes the first shaft body and the second shaft body
  • the switching assembly includes a first groove body having the first free section
  • the second groove body of the second free section includes a third groove body having the third free section and a third groove body having the first free section.
  • the fourth tank with four free sections.
  • the switching assembly includes a first switching member and a second switching member that cooperate with each other, and the first tank includes a first upper tank located on the first switching member and a first upper tank located on the first switching member.
  • the first free section includes a first upper free section located in the first upper tank body and a first lower free section located in the first lower tank body
  • the second tank body includes a second upper tank body located in the first switching member and a second lower tank body located in the second switching member
  • the second free section includes a second upper tank body located in the The second upper free section and the second lower free section located in the second lower tank, when the door is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle, the first switching member and the The second switching member is relatively stationary, the first upper free section and the first lower free section overlap to form the first free section, and the second upper free section and the second lower free section overlap to form the first free section.
  • the first switching element moves relative to the second switching element so that the fourth axis
  • the body is separated from the limiting section, and the first shaft body and/or the second shaft body is limited to the locking section, when the door body continues to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle
  • the first switching element and the second switching element are relatively stationary.
  • the locking section includes a first upper locking section communicating with the first upper free section, a first lower locking section communicating with the first lower free section, and a communicating station.
  • the first shaft body is confined to the first upper locking section and the first lower locking section at the same time
  • the second shaft body is confined to the second upper locking section and the first lower locking section at the same time.
  • the second lower locking section is a first upper locking section communicating with the first upper free section, a first lower locking section communicating with the first lower free section, and a communicating station.
  • first upper locking section and the first lower locking section are always mutually staggered, and the second upper locking section and the second lower locking section are always mutually offset. stagger.
  • first distance between the center of the first shaft and the side edges there is a first distance between the center of the first shaft and the side edges, and a second distance is between the center of the first shaft and the front wall
  • a third distance between the center of the first shaft and the side wall There is a fourth distance between the center of the third shaft and the side edges, and the center of the third shaft is
  • the center of the third shaft is
  • the first distance, the second distance, and the third distance are all kept unchanged and then show a decreasing trend.
  • the fourth pitch, the fifth pitch, and the sixth pitch remain unchanged.
  • the first switching element and the second switching element are connected to each other through a fifth shaft body, and when the door body is at a first opening angle, it continues to open to a second opening angle During the process, the first shaft moves to the locking section with the fifth shaft as the center.
  • the first switching element is closer to the first hinge element than the second switching element.
  • the first switching member includes the third shaft body, the second switching member has a through hole, and the third shaft body extends to the through hole through the through hole.
  • the third groove body, the second switching member includes the fourth shaft body, and the fourth shaft body extends to the fourth groove body.
  • the box body includes an opening and a front end surface arranged around the opening, and there is a first distance between the first shaft body and the front end surface. In the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, there is a second distance between the third shaft body and the front end surface, and the second distance is greater than the first distance.
  • the refrigerator further includes an outer side surface adjacent to the hinge assembly and on the extension section of the door body rotation path, and there is a third distance between the first shaft body and the outer side surface, when When the door is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, there is a fourth distance between the third shaft and the outer side surface, and the fourth distance is smaller than the third distance .
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides an embedded refrigerator including a box body, a door body for opening and closing the box body, and a hinge assembly connecting the box body and the door body ,
  • the box body includes a receiving chamber and a pivot side connected to the hinge assembly
  • the door body is provided with a first matching portion
  • the box body is provided with a second matching portion
  • the hinge assembly includes a hinge assembly fixed to the box
  • the relative movement is achieved by the first shaft body group and the first groove body group that cooperate with each other.
  • the first shaft body group includes a first shaft body and a second shaft body
  • the first groove body group includes a first free section
  • the second free section and the locking section the first free section includes an initial position and a stop position that are relatively set
  • the second free section includes a first section and a second section that are connected
  • the second hinge is connected to the The relative movement between the switching components is achieved by a second shaft body group and a second groove body group that cooperate with each other.
  • the second shaft body group includes a third shaft body and a fourth shaft body
  • the second groove body group includes The third free section, the fourth free section and the limit section, when the door body is in the closed state, the first shaft is located at the initial position, and the second shaft is located at the first section away from the One end of the second section, and the fourth shaft body is located in the limiting section so that the switching assembly limits the second hinge member, and the first matching portion and the second matching portion are locked with each other
  • the first shaft rotates in situ at the initial position
  • the second shaft rotates with the first shaft
  • the first matching portion separates from the second matching portion
  • the second shaft body moves in the second section to drive the first shaft body by The initial position moves to the stop position, and the door body moves from the containing chamber toward the pivoting side.
  • the The fourth shaft body is separated from the limiting section, and the first shaft body and/or the second shaft body is limited in the locking section so that the switching assembly limits the first hinge member, when When the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, the third shaft body rotates in situ in the third free section, and the fourth shaft body rotates with the third shaft The body is centered and moves in the fourth free section.
  • the door body includes a first door body and a second door body that are pivotally connected to the box body and arranged side by side in a horizontal direction
  • the refrigerator also includes a first door body and a second door body movably connected to the first door body.
  • a door body is close to the vertical beam on the side of the second door body, the first matching portion is arranged at the vertical beam, and when the door body is in the closed state, the vertical beam extends to the second
  • the door body rotates in situ relative to the box body so that the vertical beam faces a position close to the accommodating chamber.
  • the box body includes an outer side surface adjacent to the hinge assembly and on the extension section of the door body rotation path, and the door body includes a front wall away from the accommodating chamber and The side wall always sandwiched between the front wall and the accommodating chamber, there is a side edge between the front wall and the side wall, when the door is opened from the closed state to the first opening angle During the process, the side edge moves to the side of the outer side close to the containing chamber.
  • the first hinge member includes the first shaft body and the second shaft body
  • the switching assembly includes a first groove body having the first free section
  • the second groove body of the second free section includes a third groove body having the third free section and a third groove body having the first free section.
  • the fourth tank with four free sections.
  • the switching assembly includes a first switching member and a second switching member that cooperate with each other, and the first tank includes a first upper tank located on the first switching member and a first upper tank located on the first switching member.
  • the first free section includes a first upper free section located in the first upper tank body and a first lower free section located in the first lower tank body
  • the second tank body includes a second upper tank body located in the first switching member and a second lower tank body located in the second switching member
  • the second free section includes a second upper tank body located in the The second upper free section and the second lower free section located in the second lower tank, when the door is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle, the first switching member and the The second switching member is relatively stationary, the first upper free section and the first lower free section overlap to form the first free section, and the second upper free section and the second lower free section overlap to form the first free section.
  • the first switching element moves relative to the second switching element so that the fourth axis
  • the body is separated from the limiting section, and the first shaft body and/or the second shaft body is limited to the locking section, when the door body continues to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle
  • the first switching element and the second switching element are relatively stationary.
  • the locking section includes a first upper locking section communicating with the first upper free section, a first lower locking section communicating with the first lower free section, and a communicating station.
  • the first shaft body is confined to the first upper locking section and the first lower locking section at the same time
  • the second shaft body is confined to the second upper locking section and the first lower locking section at the same time.
  • the second lower locking section is a first upper locking section communicating with the first upper free section, a first lower locking section communicating with the first lower free section, and a communicating station.
  • first upper locking section and the first lower locking section are always mutually staggered, and the second upper locking section and the second lower locking section are always mutually offset. stagger.
  • first distance between the center of the first shaft and the side edges there is a first distance between the center of the first shaft and the side edges, and a second distance is between the center of the first shaft and the front wall
  • a third distance between the center of the first shaft and the side wall There is a fourth distance between the center of the third shaft and the side edges, and the center of the third shaft is
  • the center of the third shaft is
  • the first distance, the second distance, and the third distance are all kept unchanged and then show a decreasing trend.
  • the fourth pitch, the fifth pitch, and the sixth pitch remain unchanged.
  • the first switching element and the second switching element are connected to each other through a fifth shaft body, and when the door body is at a first opening angle, it continues to open to a second opening angle During the process, the first shaft moves to the locking section with the fifth shaft as the center.
  • the first switching element is closer to the first hinge element than the second switching element.
  • the first switching member includes the third shaft body, the second switching member has a through hole, and the third shaft body extends to the through hole through the through hole.
  • the third groove body, the second switching member includes the fourth shaft body, and the fourth shaft body extends to the fourth groove body.
  • the box body includes an opening and a front end surface arranged around the opening, and there is a first distance between the first shaft body and the front end surface. In the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, there is a second distance between the third shaft body and the front end surface, and the second distance is greater than the first distance.
  • the refrigerator further includes an outer side surface adjacent to the hinge assembly and on the extension section of the door body rotation path, and there is a third distance between the first shaft body and the outer side surface, when When the door is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, there is a fourth distance between the third shaft and the outer side surface, and the fourth distance is smaller than the third distance .
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides an embedded refrigerator including a box body, a door body for opening and closing the box body, and a hinge assembly connecting the box body and the door body.
  • the box body includes a receiving cavity.
  • the hinge assembly is connected to the pivot side of the hinge assembly.
  • the hinge assembly includes a first hinge part fixed to the box body, a second hinge part fixed to the door body, and connecting the first hinge part and the first hinge part.
  • a switching assembly of two hinge parts, the first hinge part and the switching assembly realize relative movement through a first shaft body and a first groove body that cooperate with each other, and the first groove body includes a first free section
  • the second hinge member and the switching assembly realize relative movement through a second shaft body group and a second groove body group that cooperate with each other, and the second shaft body group includes a third shaft body and a fourth shaft body
  • the second tank body group includes a third free section, a fourth free section, and a limit section
  • the third free section includes a relatively set starting position and a pivot position
  • the fourth free section includes successively connected movements.
  • the first shaft When the door is in the closed state, the first shaft is located in the first free section, and the fourth shaft is located in the limiting section so that the switching assembly is in the limited position.
  • the third shaft body In the second hinge member, the third shaft body is located at the starting position, and when the door body is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle, the first shaft body is positioned at the first opening angle.
  • the in-situ rotation in the free section drives the door body to rotate in situ relative to the box body.
  • the fourth shaft body is disengaged In the limiting section, the third shaft body is maintained at the initial position, and the switching assembly limits the first hinge member.
  • the fourth shaft body moves in the moving section to drive the third shaft body to move from the starting position to the pivot position, and the door body moves from the pivoting side toward the accommodating The chamber moves, and then the third shaft body rotates in situ at the pivot position, the fourth shaft body moves in the rotating section with the third shaft body as the center, and the door body is relatively The box continues to rotate in place.
  • the first hinge member includes the first shaft body
  • the switching assembly includes the first groove body, the third shaft body, and the fourth shaft body
  • the second hinge member includes a third groove body having the third free section and a fourth groove body having the fourth free section and the limiting section.
  • the switching assembly includes a first switching element and a second switching element that cooperate with each other.
  • first switching element and a second switching element that cooperate with each other.
  • the first switching element and the second switching element are relatively stationary, and when the door body is at a position that continues to open from the first opening angle to the second opening angle During the process, the first switching element moves relative to the second switching element so that the fourth shaft body is separated from the limiting section.
  • the first hinge member includes a first limiting portion
  • the first switching member includes a second limiting portion
  • the first groove body includes a
  • one of the first limiting portion and the second limiting portion is a bump, and the other is a recessed portion, and the bump includes a first limiting surface ,
  • the recessed portion includes a second limit surface, when the door body is in the closed state, the first limit surface is away from the second limit surface, and when the door body is in the closed state, the first limit surface is opened to the second limit surface.
  • the first limit surface and the second limit surface gradually approach until the first limit surface abuts the second limit surface.
  • the concave portion is located at the first switching member, and the protrusion is located at the first hinge member.
  • the opening size of the first upper groove body matches with the first shaft body, and the opening size of the first lower groove body is larger than the opening of the first upper groove body. size.
  • the first switching element includes a first stopper
  • the second switching element includes a second stopper that cooperates with the first stopper.
  • the first switching element and the second switching element are mated with each other through a fifth shaft body.
  • the first switching element is closer to the first hinge element than the second switching element.
  • the first switching member includes the third shaft body, the second switching member has a through hole, and the third shaft body extends to the through hole through the through hole.
  • the third groove body, the second switching member includes the fourth shaft body, and the fourth shaft body extends to the fourth groove body.
  • the box body includes an opening and a front end surface arranged around the opening, and there is a first distance between the first shaft body and the front end surface. In the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, there is a second distance between the third shaft body and the front end surface, and the second distance is greater than the first distance.
  • the refrigerator further includes an outer side surface adjacent to the hinge assembly and on the extension section of the door body rotation path, and there is a third distance between the first shaft body and the outer side surface, when When the door is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, there is a fourth distance between the third shaft and the outer side surface, and the fourth distance is smaller than the third distance .
  • the door body includes a front wall away from the accommodating chamber and a side wall always sandwiched between the front wall and the accommodating chamber.
  • a first matching portion is provided on the door body, and a second matching portion is provided on the box body.
  • the first matching portion Interlocked with the second mating portion, when the door body is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle, the hinge assembly drives the door body to rotate in situ relative to the box body to drive The first matching portion is separated from the second matching portion.
  • the door body includes a first door body and a second door body that are pivotally connected to the box body and arranged side by side in a horizontal direction
  • the refrigerator also includes a first door body and a second door body movably connected to the first door body.
  • a door body is close to the vertical beam on the side of the second door body, the first matching portion is arranged at the vertical beam, and when the door body is in the closed state, the vertical beam extends to the second
  • the door body rotates in situ relative to the box body so that the vertical beam faces a position close to the accommodating chamber.
  • the first mating portion is a protrusion protruding upward from the vertical beam
  • the second mating portion is a groove with a gap
  • the protrusion passes through the gap Enter or exit the groove
  • the box body further includes a fixed beam that divides the accommodating chamber into a first compartment and a second compartment
  • the door body includes a fixed beam corresponding to the first compartment.
  • the first door body and the second door body corresponding to the second compartment when the door body is in the closed state, the first door body and the second door body are in contact with the fixed beam
  • the hinge assembly drives the door body to rotate in situ relative to the box body to drive the door body away from the fixed beam.
  • the line between the starting position and the pivoting position is parallel to the moving section.
  • the third free section is elliptical, and the moving section is arc.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a built-in refrigerator, which is characterized by comprising a box body, a door body for opening and closing the box body, and a connection between the box body and the door.
  • a hinge assembly of a body, the box body includes a receiving chamber and a pivot side connected to the hinge assembly, the hinge assembly includes a first hinge member fixed to the box body, and a second hinge member fixed to the door body.
  • the body rotates in situ, and when the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the first opening angle to the second opening angle, the first switching member and the first hinge member are relatively stationary, and the second switching member Relative to the second hinge member and moving relative to the first switching member, the door body moves from the pivoting side toward the accommodating chamber, and when the door body is at the second opening angle, it continues to open to the maximum opening
  • the first hinge member, the first switching member, and the second switching member are relatively stationary, the second hinge member moves relative to the second switching member, and the door body is relatively stationary.
  • the box continues to rotate in place.
  • the first hinge member includes a first shaft body
  • the first switching member includes a third shaft body and a first upper groove body
  • the second switching member includes a fourth shaft Body and a through hole
  • the second hinge member includes a third groove body and a fourth groove body
  • the through hole includes a relatively set initial position and a stop position
  • the third groove body includes a relatively set initial position and In a pivoting position
  • the fourth tank includes a rotation start position and a rotation stop position relatively set.
  • the first shaft When the door is in a closed state, the first shaft extends to the first upper tank, so The third shaft body passes through the through hole and the third groove body in sequence, and the third shaft body is located at the initial position and the starting position, and the fourth shaft body is located at the fourth The rotation starting position of the groove body, when the door body is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle, the first shaft body rotates in situ in the first upper groove body to drive the The door body rotates in situ relative to the box body, and when the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the first opening angle to the second opening angle, the fourth shaft body remains at the rotation starting position, The third shaft body moves from the initial position to the stop position, and at the same time the third shaft body moves from the starting position to the pivoting position, the door body faces the accommodating cavity from the pivoting side When the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, the third shaft body remains at the stop position and the pivot position, and the fourth shaft body Moving from the rotation
  • the first upper groove body is circular, and the through hole and the third groove body are both elliptical.
  • the fourth groove body is a circular arc groove, and the center of the circular arc groove is the pivot position of the third groove body.
  • the first hinge member includes a first limiting portion
  • the first switching member includes a second limiting portion
  • One of the parts is a convex block
  • the other is a concave part.
  • the convex block includes a first limiting surface
  • the concave portion includes a second limiting surface.
  • the first hinge member includes a first engaging portion and a second engaging portion
  • the first switching member includes a third engaging portion, when the door is in a closed state
  • the third engaging portion is limited to the first engaging portion, when the door body is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle, the third engaging portion is separated from the first engaging portion.
  • An engaging portion, and the third engaging portion and the second engaging portion gradually approach until the third engaging portion is limited to the second engaging portion.
  • the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are both notches
  • the third engaging portion includes a third elastic member and a third boss.
  • the third elastic member acts on the third boss to be limited to the first engaging portion, and when the door body is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle , The bottom surface of the first hinge member abuts the third boss to drive the third elastic member to compress, and when the third boss contacts the second engaging portion, the third elastic The component is reset to drive the third boss to enter the second engaging portion.
  • the first switching element includes a fourth engaging portion and a fifth engaging portion
  • the second switching element includes a sixth engaging portion.
  • the fourth engaging portion and the fifth engaging portion are both notches
  • the sixth engaging portion includes a sixth elastic member and a sixth boss.
  • the sixth elastic member acts on the sixth boss to be limited to the fourth engaging portion, and when the door body is in the process from the first opening angle
  • the second switching element moves relative to the first switching element to drive the sixth engaging portion to separate from the fourth engaging portion, and the first The bottom surface of the switching element close to the second switching element abuts against the sixth boss to drive the sixth elastic element to compress, and when the sixth boss contacts the fifth engaging portion, the first The six elastic pieces are reset to drive the sixth boss to enter the fifth engaging portion.
  • the second switching member includes a first lower groove body, the first shaft body passes through the first upper groove body and the first lower groove body in sequence, and the The first lower tank body includes a first end and a second end that are oppositely arranged.
  • the first lower groove body is parallel to the through hole, and both the first lower groove body and the through hole are elliptical.
  • the first switching element and the second switching element are matched by a fifth shaft body and a fifth groove body, and the fifth groove body includes opposite third ends. And the fourth end, when the door body is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle, the fifth shaft body is kept at the third end, when the door body is at the first opening angle When continuing to open to the second opening angle, the fifth shaft moves from the third end to the fourth end.
  • the fifth groove body is parallel to the through hole, and both the fifth groove body and the through hole are elliptical.
  • the first switching element is closer to the first hinge element than the second switching element.
  • the box body includes an opening and a front end surface arranged around the opening, and there is a first distance between the first shaft body and the front end surface. In the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, there is a second distance between the third shaft body and the front end surface, and the second distance is greater than the first distance.
  • the box body further includes an outer side surface adjacent to the hinge assembly and on the extension section of the rotation path of the door body, and there is a third distance between the first shaft body and the outer side surface, When the door is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, there is a fourth distance between the third shaft and the outer side surface, and the fourth distance is smaller than the third distance.
  • the door body includes a front wall away from the accommodating chamber and a side wall always sandwiched between the front wall and the accommodating chamber. There are side edges between the side walls, the center of the third shaft body and the side edges are at a fourth distance, and the center of the third shaft body and the side walls are at a sixth distance.
  • the fourth distance and the sixth distance both show a decreasing trend.
  • the box body further includes an outer side surface adjacent to the hinge assembly and on the extension section of the door body rotation path.
  • the box body includes an opening and a front end surface arranged around the opening.
  • the initial position is farther than the stop position.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides an embedded refrigerator including a box body, a door body for opening and closing the box body, and a hinge assembly connecting the box body and the door body ,
  • the box body includes a receiving chamber and a pivot side connected to the hinge assembly
  • the hinge assembly includes a first hinge member fixed to the box body, a second hinge member fixed to the door body, and a connection
  • the switching assembly of the first hinge member and the second hinge member, the switching assembly includes a first switching member and a second switching member that cooperate with each other
  • the first hinge member includes a first shaft body
  • the first hinge member A switching member includes a third shaft body and a first upper groove body
  • the second switching member includes a fourth shaft body and a through hole
  • the second hinge member includes a third groove body and a fourth groove body.
  • the hole includes a relatively set initial position and a stop position
  • the third groove body includes a relatively set start position and a pivot position
  • the fourth groove body includes a relatively set rotation start position and a rotation stop position.
  • the fourth shaft body When the door body is at the first opening angle, it continues to open In the process of reaching the second opening angle, the fourth shaft body remains at the rotation starting position, the third shaft body moves from the initial position to the stop position, and at the same time the third shaft body Moving from the starting position to the pivoting position, the door body moves from the pivoting side toward the accommodating chamber, and when the door body is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle to the maximum opening angle, The third shaft body is maintained at the stop position and the pivot position, the fourth shaft body moves from the rotation start position to the rotation stop position, and the door body continues relative to the box body Rotate in place.
  • the beneficial effect of the present invention is that the refrigerator according to an embodiment of the present invention can increase the degree of freedom of opening and closing the door body, and can generate a variety of motion tracks to adapt to different application scenarios.
  • Fig. 1 is a perspective view of a multi-door refrigerator according to a first embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of the multi-door refrigerator in the first embodiment of the present invention in a closed state
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of the multi-door refrigerator in the first embodiment of the present invention being opened to a first intermediate opening angle
  • Figure 4 is a rear view of the multi-door refrigerator according to the first embodiment of the present invention (some components are omitted);
  • Figure 5 is an exploded view of the first and second mating parts of the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • Fig. 6 is a first perspective perspective view of the hinge assembly in the closed state of the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figures 7 to 9 are exploded views of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention in different states from a first perspective;
  • FIG. 10 is a second perspective perspective view of the hinge assembly in the closed state of the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • 11 to 13 are exploded views of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention in different states from a second viewing angle;
  • Fig. 14 is a top view of the refrigerator in a closed state according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 15 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention in a closed state
  • FIG. 16 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly in the closed state of the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 17 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention in a closed state
  • FIG. 18 is a top view of the refrigerator in the first embodiment of the present invention at a first intermediate opening angle
  • FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a first intermediate opening angle
  • FIG. 20 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a first intermediate opening angle
  • 21 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a first intermediate opening angle
  • FIG. 22 is a top view of the refrigerator in the first embodiment of the present invention at a first opening angle
  • Figure 23 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a first opening angle
  • 24 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a first opening angle
  • 25 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a first opening angle
  • Figure 26 is a top view of the refrigerator in the first embodiment of the present invention at a second opening angle
  • Figure 27 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a second opening angle
  • FIG. 28 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a second opening angle
  • Figure 29 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a second opening angle
  • Figure 30 is a top view of the refrigerator in the first embodiment of the present invention at a maximum opening angle
  • Figure 31 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at a maximum opening angle
  • 32 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at the maximum opening angle
  • 33 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the first embodiment of the present invention at the maximum opening angle
  • FIG. 34 is a schematic diagram of a fully embedded state of the refrigerator according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • 35 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly under the door body of the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 36 is an exploded view of the hinge assembly under the door in the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • Fig. 37 is a perspective view of a side-by-side refrigerator according to a second embodiment of the present invention.
  • 38 is a schematic diagram of the side-by-side refrigerator according to the second embodiment of the present invention omitting the second door body;
  • 39 is a schematic diagram of a side-by-side refrigerator according to the second embodiment of the present invention omitting the door body;
  • Figure 40 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention in a closed state
  • Figures 41 to 43 are exploded views of different states of the hinge assembly of the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 44 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the third embodiment of the present invention in a closed state
  • 45 to 48 are exploded views of different states of the hinge assembly of the third embodiment of the present invention.
  • Fig. 49 is a top view of the refrigerator in a closed state according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 50 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the third embodiment of the present invention in a closed state
  • Figure 51 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the third embodiment of the present invention in a closed state
  • FIG. 52 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly in the closed state of the third embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 53 is a top view of the refrigerator in the third embodiment of the present invention at a first opening angle
  • Figure 54 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the third embodiment of the present invention at a first opening angle
  • Figure 55 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the third embodiment of the present invention at a first opening angle
  • Figure 56 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the third embodiment of the present invention at a first opening angle
  • Fig. 57 is a top view of the refrigerator in the third embodiment of the present invention at a second opening angle
  • Figure 58 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the third embodiment of the present invention at a second opening angle
  • Fig. 59 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the third embodiment of the present invention at a second opening angle
  • Fig. 60 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the third embodiment of the present invention at a second opening angle
  • Fig. 61 is a top view of the refrigerator in the third embodiment of the present invention at a first intermediate opening angle
  • Figure 62 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the third embodiment of the present invention at a first intermediate opening angle
  • Figure 63 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the third embodiment of the present invention at a first intermediate opening angle
  • Fig. 64 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the third embodiment of the present invention at a first intermediate opening angle
  • 65 is a top view of the refrigerator in the third embodiment of the present invention at the maximum opening angle
  • Figure 66 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the third embodiment of the present invention at a maximum opening angle
  • 67 is a top cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the third embodiment of the present invention at the maximum opening angle
  • Figure 68 is a bottom cross-sectional view of the hinge assembly of the third embodiment of the present invention at the maximum opening angle
  • Figure 69 is an exploded view of a hinge assembly according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figures 70 to 73 are bottom cross-sectional views of a hinge assembly at different opening angles according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Fig. 74 is a schematic diagram of the hinge assembly of the fourth embodiment of the present invention in a closed state
  • FIG. 77 is a top view of the refrigerator in a closed state according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 78 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the fourth embodiment of the present invention in a closed state
  • Fig. 79 is a cross-sectional view of F1-F1 in Fig. 78;
  • Figure 80 is a cross-sectional view of F2-F2 in Figure 78;
  • Figure 81 is a bottom view of the hinge assembly of the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
  • Fig. 82 is a top view of the refrigerator in the fourth embodiment of the present invention at a first opening angle
  • Figure 83 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the fourth embodiment of the present invention at a first opening angle
  • Figure 84 is a cross-sectional view of F1-F1 in Figure 83;
  • Figure 85 is a cross-sectional view of F2-F2 in Figure 83;
  • Figure 86 is a bottom view of the hinge assembly of the fourth embodiment of the present invention at a first opening angle
  • Fig. 87 is a top view of the refrigerator in the fourth embodiment of the present invention at a second opening angle
  • Fig. 88 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the fourth embodiment of the present invention at a second opening angle
  • Figure 89 is a cross-sectional view of F1-F1 in Figure 88;
  • Figure 90 is a cross-sectional view of F2-F2 in Figure 88;
  • Figure 91 is a bottom view of the hinge assembly of the fourth embodiment of the present invention at a second opening angle
  • Fig. 92 is a top view of the refrigerator in the fourth embodiment of the present invention at a maximum opening angle
  • Fig. 93 is a perspective view of the hinge assembly of the fourth embodiment of the present invention at the maximum opening angle
  • Figure 94 is a cross-sectional view of F1-F1 in Figure 93;
  • Figure 95 is a cross-sectional view of F2-F2 in Figure 93;
  • Fig. 96 is a bottom view of the hinge assembly of the fourth embodiment of the present invention at the maximum opening angle
  • Fig. 97 is a perspective view of a refrigerator with a wiring module according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 98 is a top view of a refrigerator with a wiring module according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 99 is a partial enlarged view of a refrigerator with a wiring module in a three-dimensional state according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 100 is a partial enlarged view of a refrigerator with a wiring module in a top view state (corresponding to a closed state of the door) according to an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 101 is a partial enlarged view of a refrigerator with a wiring module in a top view state (corresponding to a state where the door body is opened) according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the refrigerator 100 in conjunction with FIGS. 1 to 13, includes a box body 10, a door body 20 for opening and closing the box body 10, and a hinge assembly 30 connecting the box body 10 and the door body 20.
  • the box body 10 includes a receiving chamber S and a pivot side P connected to the hinge assembly 30.
  • the hinge assembly 30 includes a first hinge part 31, a second hinge part 32, and a switching assembly 40 connecting the first hinge part 31 and the second hinge part 32.
  • the first hinge member 31 first moves relative to the switch assembly 40, and then the second hinge member 32 moves relative to the switch assembly 40.
  • the hinge assembly 30 first drives the door body 20 in place relative to the box body 10. By rotating, the door body 20 is driven to move from the pivoting side P toward the containing chamber S, and then the door body 20 is driven to continue to rotate in situ relative to the box body 10.
  • the in-situ rotation of the door body 20 relative to the box body 10 can effectively prevent the door body 20 from being unable to open normally due to the displacement of the door body 20 in a certain direction.
  • the door body 20 can be moved from the pivoting side P toward the accommodation chamber S.
  • the door body 20 is prevented from interfering with the surrounding cabinets or walls during the opening process, and it is suitable for scenes with built-in cabinets or small spaces for accommodating the refrigerator 100.
  • the switching between the first hinge part 31 and the second hinge part 32 can be realized by the switching assembly 33, and the first hinge part 31 and the second hinge part 32 can respectively realize in-situ rotation and rotation from the pivot side. Part of the function of P moving toward the containing chamber S and continuing to rotate in place, and in this embodiment, the in-situ rotation, the movement from the pivoting side P toward the containing chamber S, and the continuing in-situ rotation are completed one by one in order .
  • the first hinge part 31 is fixed to the box body 10
  • the second hinge part 32 is fixed to the door body 20
  • the switching assembly 40 includes a first matching part 41 and a second matching part 42, the first hinge part 31 and The second hinge member 32 has various combinations.
  • the first hinge member 31 and the first matching member 41 move relative to each other to drive the door body 20 relative to the box body 10. Rotate in place, and then the first hinge member 31 and the first matching member 41 move relatively to drive the door body 20 to move from the pivoting side P toward the accommodating chamber S, and the second matching member 42 limits the second hinge member 32, when When the door body 20 is in the process of continuing to open from the first opening angle ⁇ 1 to the second opening angle ⁇ 2, the second hinge member 32 is disengaged from the limit of the second matching member 42, and the first matching member 41 limits the first hinge member 31. When the door body 20 is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle ⁇ 2 to the maximum opening angle ⁇ 3, the second hinge member 32 and the second matching member 42 move relative to each other to drive the door body 20 to continue to rotate in place.
  • the first hinge part 31 of this example cooperates with the first matching part 41 to sequentially realize the door body 20 in situ rotation and the door body 20 to move from the pivoting side P toward the accommodating chamber S, and the second hinge part 32 and The second matching member 42 cooperates to realize the door body 20 continues to rotate in place, wherein the switching assembly 40 can realize the first hinge member 31 to work first and the second hinge member 32 to work afterwards through the locking and unlocking function.
  • the first hinge member 31 and the first matching member 41 move relative to each other to drive the door body 20 relative to the box body 10. Rotate in place, and the second matching member 42 limits the second hinge member 32.
  • the second hinge member 32 is separated from the second hinge member 32. The position of the mating member 42 is limited, and the first mating member 41 limits the first hinge member 31.
  • the second hinge member 32 and The relative movement of the second matching member 42 drives the door body 20 to move from the pivoting side P toward the receiving chamber S, and then the second hinge member 32 and the second matching member 42 move relative to each other to drive the door body 20 to continue to rotate in place.
  • the first hinge part 31 of this example cooperates with the first matching part 41 to realize the in-situ rotation of the door body 20
  • the second hinge part 32 cooperates with the second matching part 42 to realize the door body 20 from the pivoting side in turn.
  • P moves toward the accommodating chamber S and the door body 20 continues to rotate in place, wherein the switching assembly 40 can realize the first hinge member 31 to work first, and the second hinge member 32 to work later through the locking and unlocking function.
  • the refrigerator 100 of this embodiment is described in detail by taking multiple specific implementations of these two combinations as an example, and the refrigerator 100 is a multi-door refrigerator 100 as an example.
  • FIG. 1 to 5 are schematic diagrams of the multi-door refrigerator 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • the refrigerator 100 includes a box body 10, a door body 20 for opening and closing the box body 10, and a hinge assembly 30 connecting the box body 10 and the door body 20.
  • the structure of this embodiment is not only applicable to the multi-door refrigerator 100 with the hinge assembly 30, but also applicable to other scenes, such as cabinets, wine cabinets, wardrobes, etc.
  • the present invention takes the multi-door refrigerator 100 as an example. For illustration, but not limited to this.
  • the box body 10 includes a receiving chamber S and a pivot side P connected to the hinge assembly 30.
  • the “pivoting side P” is defined as the area where the door body 20 rotates relative to the box body 10, that is, the area where the hinge assembly 30 is provided.
  • the direction of the pivoting side P toward the accommodating chamber S is defined as the first direction X
  • the accommodating cavity The direction of the chamber S toward the pivoting side P is defined as the second direction Y.
  • the box body 10 when the left and right sides of the refrigerator 100 are provided with hinge assemblies 30, the box body 10 includes a left pivoting side P1 and a right pivoting side P2.
  • the pivoting side P is the left pivoting side P1
  • the first One direction X is from left to right
  • the second direction Y is from right to left
  • the pivoting side P is the right pivoting side P2
  • the first direction X is from right to left
  • the first direction X is from right to left.
  • the two directions Y are from left to right, that is, corresponding to different pivoting sides P, the actual directions of the first direction X and the second direction Y are different, and the following description regards the pivoting side P as the left pivot Take P1 as an example.
  • the door body 20 is provided with a first matching portion 25, and the box body 10 is provided with a second matching portion 12.
  • the hinge assembly 30 includes a first hinge member 31 fixed to the box body 10, a second hinge member 32 fixed to the door body 20, and a switching assembly connecting the first hinge member 31 and the second hinge member 32 40.
  • the first hinge member 31 and the switching assembly 40 realize relative movement through the first shaft body groups 311, 312 and the first groove body groups 411, 412 that cooperate with each other, and the first shaft body groups 311 and 312 include the first shaft body 311 And the second shaft 312, the first slot group 411, 412 includes a first free section S1, a second free section S2, and a locking section 4132, 4142, 4152, 4162, the first free section S1 includes an initial position that is relatively set A1 and the stop position A2, the second free section S2 includes the first section L1 and the second section L2 that are connected.
  • the second hinge member 32 and the switching assembly 40 realize relative movement through the mutually matched second shaft groups 321, 322 and the second groove body groups 421, 422.
  • the second shaft groups 321, 322 include the third shaft body 321.
  • the fourth shaft 322, the second slot group 421, 422 includes a third free section 421, a fourth free section 4221, and a limiting section 4222.
  • the first shaft 311 is located at the initial position A1
  • the second shaft 312 is located at the end of the first section L1 away from the second section L2
  • the fourth shaft The body 322 is located in the limiting section 4222 so that the switching assembly 40 limits the second hinge member 32, and the first matching portion 25 and the second matching portion 12 are engaged with each other.
  • first mating part 25 and the second mating part 12 are engaged with each other to realize the closing of the door body 20 and the box body 10, and the specific form of the first mating part 25 and the second mating part 12 can be determined according to actual conditions.
  • the first shaft 311 rotates in place at the initial position A1, and the second shaft 312 rotates at the first
  • the shaft body 311 is centered and moves in the first section L1
  • the first matching portion 25 is separated from the second matching portion 12
  • the door body 20 rotates in situ relative to the box body 10
  • the second shaft body 312 moves in the second section L2
  • the first shaft body 311 is driven to move from the initial position A1 to the stop position A2, and the door body 20 moves from the pivoting side P toward the containing chamber S.
  • the door body 20 when the door body 20 is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first intermediate opening angle ⁇ 11 (refer to FIGS. 18 to 21), the first shaft body 311 rotates in place at the initial position A1, and the second shaft body 312 moves in the first section L1 with the first shaft body 311 as the center, the door body 20 rotates in situ relative to the box body 10, and the first matching portion 25 separates from the second matching portion 12.
  • the door body 20 when the door body 20 is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first intermediate opening angle ⁇ 11, the door body 20 rotates in situ relative to the box body 10, that is, the door body 20 only rotates without displacement in other directions, which can be effective.
  • the phenomenon that the first matching portion 25 cannot be separated from the second matching portion 12 due to the displacement of the door body 20 in a certain direction is avoided.
  • the refrigerator 100 may be a single-door refrigerator with a first matching portion 25 and a second matching portion 12, or a side-by-side refrigerator, a multi-door refrigerator, etc., with a first matching portion 25 and a second matching portion 12
  • the refrigerator 100 is a five-door refrigerator.
  • the second shaft body 312 moves in the second section L2 to drive the first shaft
  • the body 311 moves from the initial position A1 to the stop position A2, and the door body 20 moves from the pivoting side P toward the accommodation chamber S.
  • the door body 20 when the door body 20 is in the process of continuing to open from the first intermediate opening angle ⁇ 11 to the first opening angle ⁇ 1, the door body 20 moves toward the side of the accommodating chamber S, that is, the door body 20 is opposite to the box body at this time. 10 is rotated and displaced in the first direction X relative to the box body 10, so that the door body 20 protrudes from the box body 10 toward the side away from the containing chamber S during the rotation process will be greatly reduced, that is, the door
  • the displacement of the body 20 in the first direction X offsets the part that protrudes from the box body 10 in the second direction Y during the rotation of the door body 20, thereby preventing the door body 20 from interacting with surrounding cabinets or walls during the opening process. Interference is suitable for scenes with built-in cabinets or small space for accommodating refrigerator 100.
  • the fourth shaft body 322 is separated from the limiting section 4222, and the first shaft body 311 And/or the second shaft body 312 is confined to the locking segments 4132, 4142, 4152, 4162, so that the switching assembly 40 constrains the first hinge member 31.
  • the third shaft body 321 rotates in situ in the third free section 421, and the fourth shaft The body 322 moves in the fourth free section 4221 with the third shaft body 321 as the center, and the door body 20 continues to rotate in situ relative to the box body 10.
  • the door body 20 includes a first door body 206 and a second door body 207 that are pivotally connected to the box body 10 and arranged side by side in a horizontal direction.
  • the refrigerator 100 further includes a vertical beam 80 movably connected to a side of the first door body 206 close to the second door body 207, and the first matching portion 25 is provided at the vertical beam 80.
  • the vertical beam 80 is movably connected to the right side of the first door body 206.
  • the vertical beam 80 and the first door body 206 can be connected by a return spring 81.
  • the vertical beam 80 is centered on the vertical axis relative to the first door.
  • the body 206 rotates. In other words, the vertical beam 80 can rotate relative to the first door body 206 through the action of the return spring 81 and maintain a predetermined position.
  • the first matching portion 25 is a protrusion 25 that protrudes upward from the vertical beam 80.
  • the second mating portion 12 is fixed on the box body 10, for example, the second mating portion 12 is a groove 12 on the base 104, the base 104 is fixed on the top of the containing chamber S, and one end of the groove 12 has a gap 121 ,
  • the opening direction of the notch 121 is forward, the protrusion 25 and the groove 12 are both arc-shaped, and the protrusion 25 enters or leaves the groove 12 through the notch 121 to realize the mutual restriction and separation of the protrusion 25 and the groove 12.
  • first matching portion 25 and the second matching portion 12 are not limited to the above description, that is, the first matching portion 25 is not limited to the protrusion 25 at the vertical beam 80, and the second matching portion 12 It is not limited to the groove 12 that cooperates with the protrusion 25, and the first matching portion 25 and the second matching portion 12 may be structures in which other areas of the refrigerator 100 cooperate with each other.
  • the door body 20 further includes a third door body 208 and a fourth door body 209 that are pivotally connected to the box body 10 and arranged side by side in a horizontal direction.
  • the third door body 208 is located below the first door body 206.
  • the fourth door 209 is located below the second door 207, and the refrigerator 100 further includes a drawer 300 located below the third door 208 and the fourth door 209.
  • the accommodating chamber S corresponding to the first door 206 and the second door 207 is a refrigerating room, that is, the refrigerating room has a side-by-side door structure; the third door 208 and the fourth door 209 respectively correspond to two independent temperature-changing rooms Chamber; the drawer 300 is a freezer drawer.
  • the refrigerator 100 includes a fixed beam fixed inside the cabinet 10 and used to separate two temperature-variable compartments.
  • the third door body 208 and the fourth door body 209 can cooperate with the fixed beam to achieve sealing, that is to say At this time, there is no need to set up vertical beams at the third door body 208 and the fourth door body 209.
  • the first hinge member 31 includes a first shaft body 311 and a second shaft body 322, and the switching assembly 40 includes a first groove body 411 having a first free section S1, and a second free section S2.
  • the first matching member 41 and the second matching member 42 are specifically a first switching member 401 and a second switching member 402 that cooperate with each other, that is, the switching assembly 40 includes a first switching member 401 and a second switching member 401 that cooperate with each other.
  • the switch 402 is not limited to this.
  • the first tank 411 includes a first upper tank 413 located on the first switching member 401 and a first lower tank 414 located on the second switching member 402.
  • the first free section S1 includes a first upper tank 413 located on the first upper tank 413.
  • the second tank 412 includes a second upper tank 415 located in the first switching member 401 and a second lower tank 416 located in the second switching member 402, and the second free section S2 includes a second upper tank 415 located in the second upper tank 415.
  • the locking section 4132, 4142, 4152, 4162 includes a first upper locking section 4132 connected to the first upper free section 4131, a first lower locking section 4142 connected to the first lower free section 4141, and a second upper free section 4151 The second upper locking section 4152 and the second lower locking section 4162 communicating with the second lower free section 4161.
  • first upper locking section 4132 may be an extension of the first upper free section 4131.
  • first upper locking section 4132 is close to the stop position A2, or it may be separated from the first upper free section 4131.
  • a certain included angle may not include the first upper locking section 4132 and the second upper locking section 4152, but the first lower locking section 4142 and the second lower locking section 4162 can be used for locking.
  • the first upper locking section 4132 and the first lower locking section 4142 are always staggered from each other, and the second upper locking section 4152 and the second lower locking section 4162 are always staggered from each other.
  • the first switching element 401 is closer to the first hinge element 31 than the second switching element 402, that is, the first hinge element 31, the first switching element 401, the second switching element 402, and the second hinge element 32 Stacked in turn.
  • the hinge assembly 30 further includes a first riveting piece 4111 and a second riveting piece 4121.
  • first riveting piece 4111 When the first shaft body 311 extends into the first groove body 411, the first riveting piece 4111 is located at the second switching element The first shaft body 311 is sleeved under 402, so that the first shaft body 311 can be prevented from detaching from the first groove body 411.
  • second riveting piece The 4121 is located below the second switching member 402 and sleeves the second shaft 312, so that the second shaft 312 can be prevented from being separated from the second groove 412.
  • the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 are mated with each other through the fifth shaft body 50.
  • first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 are provided with a first through hole 4014 and a second through hole 4024, and an independent riveting element as a fifth shaft 50 passes through the first through hole 4014 and the second through hole 4024.
  • the fifth shaft body 50 includes a riveting post 51 and a riveting post washer 52.
  • the end of the riveting post 51 with a larger size is located below the second through hole 4024, and the end of the riveting post 51 with a smaller size extends to the first through hole 4024 in turn.
  • the riveting post gasket 52 is located above the first through hole 4014 and cooperates with the riveting post 51 to lock the riveting post 51.
  • the mutual mating of the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 can be realized, and the relative movement of the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 can be realized, and the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 can be realized. Will not be separated from each other.
  • first through hole 4014 and the second through hole 4024 are matched with the fifth shaft body 50, and the first switching member 401 rotates in situ relative to the second switching member 402.
  • a through hole may be provided on one of the first switching member 401 and the second switching member 402, and a fifth shaft 50 is provided on the other, and the fifth shaft 50 is matched with the through hole.
  • the mutual mating of the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 is realized, but not limited to this.
  • the first switching member 401 includes a third shaft body 321
  • the second switching member 402 has a through hole 4026
  • the third shaft body 321 extends to the third groove body 421 through the through hole 4026
  • the second switching member 402 includes a fourth The shaft 322, and the fourth shaft 322 extends to the fourth slot 422.
  • the size of the through hole 4026 may be larger than the size of the third shaft body 321. In this way, the third shaft body 321 can be moved in the through hole 4026. When the first switching member 401 and the second switching member 402 move relative to each other, Avoid mutual interference between the through hole 4026 and the third shaft body 321.
  • the third shaft body 321 and the fourth shaft body 322 of this embodiment are located in different switching elements, but not limited to this.
  • the first switching member 401 includes a first lining 4011, a first sliding plate 4012, and a first bushing 4013 that are sequentially stacked
  • the second switching member 402 includes sequentially stacked The second lining 4021, the second sliding piece 4022, and the second bushing 4023.
  • first hinge member 31, the first lining 4011, the first sliding piece 4012, the first bushing 4013, the second lining 4021, the second sliding piece 4022, the second bushing 4023, and the second hinge member 32 are composed of Stacked one by one from top to bottom.
  • the first liner 4011, the first liner 4013, the second liner 4021, and the second liner 4023 are made of plastic material, such as polyformaldehyde (POM).
  • POM polyformaldehyde
  • the first sliding piece 4012 and the second sliding piece 4022 are made of metal, such as stainless steel or Q235 steel.
  • the outer contours of the first lining 4011, the first sliding piece 4012, and the first bushing 4013 match each other.
  • the first lining 4011 and the first bushing 4013 cooperate with each other to sandwich the first sliding piece 4012 between the two ,
  • the first lining 4011, the first sliding piece 4012, and the first bushing 4013 all need to be provided with slots to cooperate to form the first upper groove 413, the second upper groove 415, and the first through hole 4014.
  • the first through hole 4014 may be formed by only forming slots on the first sliding piece 4012 and the first bushing 4013, that is, the first through hole 4014 does not penetrate the first lining piece 4011, at this time, the fifth shaft body 50 It extends from below the first switching member 401 to the first through hole 4011, and the first lining 4011 can shield the first through hole 4014 and the fifth shaft 50 to improve the aesthetics.
  • the outer contours of the second lining 4021, the second sliding piece 4022, and the second bushing 4023 match each other, and the second lining 4021 and the second bushing 4023 cooperate with each other to sandwich the second sliding piece 4022 between the two , And the second lining 4021, the second sliding piece 4022 and the second bushing 4023 all need to be provided with slots to cooperate to form the first lower groove body 414, the second lower groove body 416 and the second through hole 4024.
  • the second through hole 4024 may be formed by only forming slots on the second lining 4021 and the second sliding piece 4022, that is, the second through hole 4024 does not penetrate the second bushing 4023.
  • the fifth shaft body 50 It extends from below the second bush 4023 to the second through hole 4024 and the first through hole 4011, and the second bush 4023 can shield the second through hole 4024 and the fifth shaft 50 to improve the aesthetics.
  • one end of the riveting column 51 of the fifth shaft body 50 can be limited to the second bushing 4023 to further improve the matching effect of the second bushing 4021, the second sliding piece 4022 and the second bushing 4023.
  • the first switching element 401 further includes a first decorative sheet 4015 covering the periphery of the first lining 4011, the first sliding sheet 4012, and the first bushing 4013
  • the second switching element 402 further includes covering the first lining 4011.
  • the two lining pieces 4021, the second sliding piece 4022, and the second decoration piece 4025 on the periphery of the second bushing 4023, the first decoration piece 4015 and the second decoration piece 4025 are separated from each other.
  • first decorative piece 4015 and the second decorative piece 4025 will also move relative to each other.
  • the first decorative sheet 4015 of this embodiment is in the shape of a "door", that is, the first decorative sheet 4015 only covers the three sides of the first switching member 401, which facilitates the assembly of the first decorative sheet 4015 and can be installed here.
  • the three sides are provided with buckle structures to achieve the cooperation with the first decorative sheet 4015.
  • the width of the first decorative sheet 4015 is approximately equal to the first lining 4011 , The sum of the thickness of the first sliding piece 4012 and the first bushing 4013.
  • the second decorative sheet 4025 is in the shape of a "door", that is, the second decorative sheet 4025 only covers the three sides of the second switching member 402, which facilitates the assembly of the second decorative sheet 4025 and can be installed on these three sides.
  • a buckle structure is provided at the position to achieve the cooperation with the second decorative sheet 4025.
  • the width of the second decorative sheet 4025 is approximately equal to the second lining 4021 and the second The sum of the thickness of the sliding piece 4022 and the second bushing 4023.
  • the first decorative sheet 4015 and the second decorative sheet 4025 may be made of ABS (Acrylonitrile Butdiene Styrene) plastic.
  • the box body 10 includes an outer side surface 13 adjacent to the hinge assembly 30 and on the extension section of the rotation path of the door body 20.
  • the door body 20 includes a front wall 21 away from the containing chamber S and is always sandwiched on the front wall 21
  • the side wall 22 between the accommodating chamber S and the front wall 21 has a side edge 23 between the front wall 21 and the side wall 22.
  • the first switching member 401 and the second switching member 402 are relatively stationary, and the first upper free section 4131 and the first lower free section 4141 overlap to form a first free section S1 ,
  • the second upper free section 4151 and the second lower free section 4161 overlap to form a second free section S2
  • the first shaft body 311 is located at the initial position A1
  • the second shaft body 312 is located at the end of the first section L1 away from the second section L2
  • the bump 25 is limited in the groove 12.
  • the bump 25 is limited in the groove 12 so that the vertical beam 80 extends to the second door body 207, that is, the vertical beam 80 will be attached to the inner surfaces of the first door body 206 and the second door body 207 at this time. , To prevent the cold air in the accommodating chamber S from leaking to the outside of the refrigerator 100.
  • outer side surface 13 and the side wall 22 are located on the same plane, which can ensure the smoothness of the appearance, improve the aesthetics, and also facilitate the installation of the door body 20, but it is not limited to this.
  • the protrusion 25 gradually escapes from the groove 12 through the notch 121, and at the same time, the vertical beam 80 rotates toward the side close to the receiving chamber S so that the first door 206 and the vertical beam 80 have a first folding angle ⁇ .
  • the first folding angle ⁇ is preferably kept less than 90 degrees to prevent the vertical beam 80 from affecting the opening and closing of the second door body 207.
  • the convex block 25 and the groove 12 are in an arc-shaped fit, when the door body 20 is in the closed state, in the first direction X or the second direction Y, the convex block 25 and the groove 12 are mutually Limiting, if the door 20 is displaced in the first direction X or the second direction Y when the door 20 is opened to the first intermediate opening angle ⁇ 11 at this time, then the protrusion 25 and the groove 11 will interact with each other. The interference jam causes the bump 25 to fail to escape from the groove 12, and the door 20 cannot be opened.
  • the door body 20 when the door body 20 is opened to the first intermediate opening angle ⁇ 11, the door body 20 rotates in situ relative to the box body 10 to ensure that the door body 20 does not occur along the first direction X or the second direction Y during this process. Displacement, thereby ensuring that the bump 25 can smoothly escape from the groove 12.
  • the first intermediate opening angle ⁇ 11 is not greater than 10°, that is to say, approximately when the door body 20 is opened to 10°, the convex block 25 may not be restricted by the groove 12, at this time, it may be convex.
  • the block 25 is completely separated from the groove 12, or the protrusion 25 will not interfere with the groove 12 even if it is displaced in the first direction X or the second direction Y.
  • the side edge 23 moves to the side of the outer side surface 13 close to the receiving chamber S, that is, at this time, the hinge assembly 30 drives the side edge 23 to move to the side close to the receiving chamber S, and the door 20 is opened during the opening process. In this way, it is possible to avoid interference with surrounding cabinets or walls due to the side ribs 23 protruding from the outer side surface 13.
  • the side ribs 23 are moved to the side close to the accommodating chamber S to the outside.
  • the hinge assembly 30 drives the side edge 23 to move in the plane and gradually approach the containing chamber S.
  • the side edge 23 is made as close to the outer side surface 13 as possible.
  • the door body 20 can be prevented from contacting the surrounding cabinets during the opening process. Or interference is caused by the wall, etc., and the opening of the box 10 can be ensured as much as possible.
  • the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 will never be staggered with each other, that is, the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 remain relatively stationary, which can avoid the first upper free section 4131 and the first lower free section 4141 are mutually misaligned, and at the same time, the second upper free section 4151 and the second lower free section 4161 are prevented from displacing each other. In this way, the smooth movement of the first shaft body 311 in the first free section S1 can be ensured, and the second shaft body 312 is free in the second free section. Section S2 moves smoothly.
  • the first switching member 401 and the second switching member 402 move relative to each other so that the second hinge member 32 is disengaged from the limit of the switching assembly 40, and the first shaft body 311 and/or the second shaft body 312 are limited to the locking section 4132, 4142, 4152, 4162 and the switch assembly 40 to limit the first hinge member 31
  • first shaft body 311 is confined to the first upper locking section 4132 and the first lower locking section 4142 at the same time
  • second shaft body 312 is confined to the second upper locking section 4152 and the second lower locking section at the same time.
  • the stop section 4162, and the fourth shaft body 322 departs from the fourth limit section 4222, the description is as follows:
  • the second shaft 312 moves from the second free section S2 to the second lower locking section 4162 and is limited.
  • the first shaft 311 and the second shaft 312 Can no longer move relative to the first free section S1 and the second free section S2, and at this time, the first shaft body 311 is adjacent to the first upper locking section 4132 and the first lower locking section 4142, and the second shaft body 312 is adjacent to the second
  • the trajectories of the upper locking section 4152, the first upper locking section 4132 and the second upper locking section 4152 are adapted to the movement paths of the first shaft body 311 and the second shaft body 312.
  • the door body 20 drives the second hinge member 32 connected to the door body 20 to move, and the second hinge member 32 passes through the third free section 4211 and the fourth limit section At 4222, a force is applied to the third shaft 321 and the fourth shaft 322, and then the third shaft 321 and the fourth shaft 322 drive the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 to move.
  • the first shaft body 311 is adjacent to the first upper locking section 4132
  • the second shaft body 312 is adjacent to the second upper locking section 4152
  • the first switching member 401 can be opposed to the first shaft body 311 and the second shaft body.
  • 312 moves by a first angle until the first shaft body 311 is confined to the first upper locking section 4132
  • the second shaft body 312 is confined to the second upper locking section 4152
  • the second switching member 402 is positioned at the fifth shaft body 50 is the center of the circle and moves a second angle relative to the first shaft body 311 until the first shaft body 311 is confined within the second upper locking section 4152.
  • the second shaft body 312 and the second lower locking section 4162 Always touch, the second angle is greater than the first angle.
  • both the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 will rotate at a certain angle, and the rotation angle of the second switching element 402 is greater than the rotation angle of the first switching element 401, the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 401 Relative movement will also occur between 402 and they will be staggered with each other.
  • the rotation process of the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 does not have a certain sequence, and the two can be rotated at the same time.
  • the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 are in a certain sequence. Synchronous rotation within the rotation angle range, and then the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 are staggered with each other.
  • first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 drive the first groove body 411 and the second groove body 412 to rotate relative to the first shaft body 311 and the second shaft body 312, respectively, and the first shaft body 311 separates from the first shaft body 311 and the second shaft body 312.
  • the free section S1 abuts the first upper locking section 4132 and the first lower locking section 4142, that is, the first shaft body 311 is confined to the first upper locking section 4132 and the first lower locking section 4142 at the same time, and the second The shaft 312 is separated from the second free section S2 and abuts against the second upper locking section 4152 and the second lower locking section 4162, that is, the second shaft 312 is confined to the second upper locking section 4152 and the second lower locking section at the same time.
  • the movement of the second switching member 402 causes the fourth shaft 322 to escape from the fourth limiting section 4222.
  • first shaft body 311 when the first shaft body 311 is located at the first upper locking section 4132 and the first lower locking section 4142, since the first switching element 401 and the second switching element 402 are mutually staggered, they are originally overlapped with each other.
  • the first upper free section 4131 and the first lower free section 4141 will also be staggered.
  • the first upper free section 4131 and the first lower free section 4141 are mutually staggered to restrict the first shaft body 311 from being separated from the first upper locking section 4132.
  • the first lower locking section 4142 can ensure that the first shaft body 311 is always maintained at the first upper locking section 4132 and the first lower locking section 4142 while the door body 20 continues to be opened.
  • the staggered second upper free section 4151 and the second lower free section 4161 restrict the second shaft 312 from separating from the second upper locking section 4152 and The second lower locking section 4162 can ensure that the second shaft 312 remains at the second upper locking section 4152 and the second lower locking section 4162 while the door 20 continues to be opened.
  • the rotation angle of the second switching element 402 is greater than the rotation angle of the first switching element 401, that is, the second switching element 402 and the first switching element 401 are staggered with each other, which can further improve the relationship between the first hinge element 31 and the switching assembly 40.
  • the locking effect ensures that the first shaft 311 is always maintained at the first upper locking section 4132 and the first lower locking section 4142, and the second shaft 312 is always maintained at the second upper locking section 4152 and the first lower locking section 4142.
  • the second locking section is at 4162.
  • the distance between the third shaft 321 on the first switching element 401 and the fourth shaft 322 on the second switching element 402 occurs.
  • the third shaft body 321 is always located in the third free section 4211, and the fourth shaft body 322 moves from the fourth limit section 4222 to the fourth free section 4221, that is, the fourth shaft body 322 departs from the fourth limit section 4222 .
  • the range of the first opening angle ⁇ 1 is approximately 80°-83°
  • the second opening angle ⁇ 2 is approximately 90°
  • the maximum opening angle ⁇ 3 is greater than 90°, that is, the door body 20 is opened to 80°-83°
  • the door body 20 first rotates in situ and then displaces in the first direction X to avoid interference between the door body 20 and the surrounding cabinets or walls during the opening process, and finally reaches 80° ⁇ 83°.
  • the switching assembly 40 moves to make the door body 20 replace the rotation axis and continue to rotate, that is, after 90°, the door body 20 uses the third shaft body 321 as the rotation axis relative to the box body 10 Continue to rotate in place to further open the door body 20.
  • this embodiment can effectively control the sequence switching of the first hinge member 31 and the second hinge member 32 through the unlocking and locking effects of the switching assembly 40 on the first hinge member 31 and the second hinge member 32, so that the door The body 20 can be stably opened.
  • the switching assembly 40 can also effectively control the sequence switching of the first hinge member 31 and the second hinge member 32, namely When the door body 20 is in the process of closing from the maximum opening angle ⁇ 3 to the second opening angle ⁇ 2, the third shaft body 321 moves in the third free section 4211, the fourth shaft body 322 moves in the fourth free section 4221, and switches The assembly 40 locks the first hinge member 31.
  • the first switching member 401 and the second switching member 402 move relative to each other so that the first The hinge member 31 is disengaged from the limit of the switching assembly 40, and the fourth shaft 322 is limited in the fourth limit section 4222.
  • the switching assembly 40 locks the second hinge member 32.
  • the closing process of the door body 20 and the opening process of the door body 20 are in the opposite sequence.
  • the unlocking and locking effects of the switching assembly 40 on the first hinge member 31 and the second hinge member 32 can effectively control the door.
  • the center of the first shaft body 311 and the side edges 23 are at a first distance
  • the center of the first shaft body 311 and the front wall 21 are at a second distance
  • the center of the first shaft body 311 is
  • the side walls 22 are at a third distance
  • the center of the third shaft 312 and the side edges 23 are at a fourth distance
  • the center of the third shaft 312 and the front wall 21 are at a fifth distance
  • the third shaft is at a fifth distance.
  • the first shaft body 311 and the third shaft body 321 are staggered from each other, so that it can be applied to a scene where a built-in cabinet or a refrigerator 100 has a small space.
  • FIG. 34 a simple schematic diagram of the refrigerator 100 embedded in the cabinet 200 is taken as an example for description.
  • the box body 10 includes an opening 102 and a front end surface 103 arranged around the opening 102.
  • the box body 10 also includes a receiving chamber S and an outer side surface 13 adjacent to the hinge assembly 30 and on the extension of the rotation path of the door body 20.
  • the door body 20 includes a front wall 21 away from the containing chamber S and a side wall 22 always sandwiched between the front wall 21 and the containing chamber S.
  • a side edge 23 is provided between the front wall 21 and the side wall 22.
  • the door body 20 when the door body 20 is in the closed state and is opened to the first opening angle ⁇ 1, the door body 20 rotates about the first shaft body 311, and there is a first distance between the first shaft body 311 and the front end surface 103,
  • the door body 20 When the door body 20 is in the process of continuing to open from the second opening angle ⁇ 2 to the maximum opening angle ⁇ 3, the door body 20 rotates around the third shaft body 321, and there is a second shaft between the third shaft body 321 and the front end surface 103.
  • the second distance is greater than the first distance. In this way, the maximum opening angle of the fully built-in refrigerator 100 can be greatly increased.
  • the door body 20 moves relative to the door body 20 with the first shaft body 311 and the third shaft body 321 as axes in sequence.
  • the hinge assembly 30 further includes a second shaft body 312 matching the first shaft body 311 and a fourth shaft body 322 matching the third shaft body 321.
  • the door body 20 simply regard the door body 20 as the first
  • the one shaft body 311 is used as the axis to rotate, and then the switching assembly 40 is switched to use the third shaft body 321 as the axis to rotate.
  • the refrigerator 100 is a freely embedded refrigerator, that is, the front end 201 of the cabinet 200 and the front wall 21 of the door 20 away from the cabinet 10 It is located on the same plane, or the front wall 21 of the door body 20 does not protrude from the front end 201 of the cabinet 200 at all.
  • all refrigerators are single-axis refrigerators, and a certain distance must be maintained between the rotation axis of the refrigerator and the side wall and front wall of the refrigerator. In this way, there can be enough space to satisfy foaming or other processes.
  • the position of the rotation axis of the refrigerator is roughly at the position of the first shaft body 311 in Figure 34.
  • the cabinet 200 is sandwiched between the front end 201 and the inner wall 202.
  • 203 is arranged corresponding to the side edge 23 of the door body 20. When the door body 20 is opened, the side edge 23 will interfere with the door body 20 to limit the maximum opening angle of the door body 20.
  • the prior art In order to ensure the normal opening of the door body 20, the prior art The usual method is to increase the gap between the inner wall 202 of the cabinet 200 and the refrigerator 100.
  • the gap roughly needs to be about 10 cm, which will seriously affect the embedding effect and is not conducive to the rational use of the limited space.
  • the shaded area represents the door 20 in the closed state.
  • the door 20 When the door 20 is in the process of opening, if the door 20 always rotates around the first shaft 311 (that is, the prior art), refer to Figure 34 Dotted line door 20', because the first shaft 311 is close to the front end 103, that is, the first shaft 311 is away from the front end 201 of the cabinet 200 at this time.
  • the corners 203 of the cabinet 200 will change It interferes with the door body 20' to limit the maximum opening angle of the door body 20'.
  • the third shaft body 321 is located on the first switching member 401.
  • the switching assembly 40 moves relative to the first hinge member 31 and the second hinge member 32 to make the third shaft body 321 gradually moves away from the front end surface 103, that is, the third shaft 321 gradually moves toward the front end 201 of the cabinet 200, that is, at this time, the entire door body 20 moves away from the cabinet 10, refer to the solid line in FIG. 34
  • the interference effect of the door 20 and the corners 203 of the cabinet 200 on the door 20 is greatly reduced, and the corners 203 of the cabinet 200 will interfere with each other when the door 20 is opened to a larger angle, thereby greatly increasing the maximum opening angle of the door 20.
  • the switch assembly 40 can make the late door 20 rotate around the third shaft 321 as the axis, and the maximum opening of the door 20 can be effectively increased on the premise that the refrigerator 100 is freely inserted into the cabinet 200.
  • the angle thereby facilitating the user to operate the refrigerator 100, can greatly improve the user experience.
  • the switching assembly 40 of this embodiment drives the third shaft 321 to gradually move toward the front end 201 of the cabinet 200, it also drives the third shaft 321 to gradually approach the inner wall 202 of the cabinet 200, that is, when When the door body 20 rotates with the third shaft body 321 as the axis, the third shaft body 321 is closer to the front end 201 and the inner wall 202 of the cabinet 200 than the first shaft body 311 at this time. In this way, the door body 20 can be improved.
  • the maximum opening angle can make the door 20 far away from the box body 10 to increase the opening degree of the box body 10, which facilitates the opening and closing of shelves, drawers, etc. in the box body 10, or in other words, facilitates the picking and placing of items.
  • the third shaft body 321 ultimately serving as the rotating shaft can also be located in other positions.
  • the third shaft body 321 at this time is compared with the first shaft.
  • the body 311 is close to the front end 201 of the cabinet 200, and the third shaft 321 is farther away from the inner wall 202 of the cabinet 200 than the first shaft 311.
  • the switching assembly 40 controls the switching sequence of the first hinge member 31 and the second hinge member 32 during the opening and closing of the door body 20, which can effectively prevent the door body 20 from interfering with the cabinet 200 during the opening and closing process.
  • the specific shaft groove design can effectively control the movement trajectory of the door 20.
  • the box 10 includes the pivot side P connected to the hinge assembly 30.
  • the hinge assembly 30 at least drives the door body 20 to move from the pivoting side P toward the accommodating chamber S, so as to prevent the door body 20 from interfering with the surrounding cabinets or walls during the opening process.
  • the specific design can refer to the following implementation.
  • the structure of the hinge assembly 30 located in different areas of the door body 20 will be different.
  • the above-mentioned hinge assembly 30 is the hinge assembly 30 located above the door body 20 and the box body 10. Below, refer to FIGS. 35 and 36. , A brief introduction to the hinge assembly 30' located below the door body 20 and the box body 10.
  • the difference between the lower hinge assembly 30' and the upper hinge assembly 30 is that the first hinge part 31' of the lower hinge assembly 30' has a convex portion 313', and the second hinge part 32' has a corresponding hook 323',
  • the hook 323' is an elastic member.
  • the convex portion 313' acts on the hook 323' to deform to make the door body 20 and the box body 10 closely fit.
  • the door body 20 drives the hook 323' to move, and the hook 323' is deformed and detaches from the convex portion 313'.
  • the second hinge part 32' also includes an extension 324' that passes through the switching assembly 40' in the thickness direction,
  • the extension section 324' is connected to the hook 323', so that the hook 323' is arranged horizontally and can be matched with the convex portion 313'.
  • the refrigerator 100a is a side-by-side refrigerator 100a.
  • the box body 10a includes a pivoting side P connecting the hinge assembly 30a, a receiving chamber S, and a fixed beam 70a that divides the receiving chamber S into a first compartment S3 and a second compartment S4.
  • the door 20a includes a first door 204a corresponding to the first compartment S3 and a second door 205a corresponding to the second compartment S4.
  • the “pivoting side P” is defined as the area where the door body 20a rotates relative to the box body 10a, that is, the area where the hinge assembly 30a is provided.
  • the direction of the pivoting side P toward the accommodating chamber S is defined as the first direction X
  • the accommodating chamber The direction of the chamber S toward the pivoting side P is defined as the second direction Y.
  • the left and right sides of the refrigerator 100a of this embodiment are provided with hinge assemblies 30a, and the box body 10a includes a left pivot side P1 and a right pivot side P2.
  • the pivot side P is the left pivot side P1 ( That is, when the pivoting side P corresponds to the first door body 204a)
  • the first direction X is from left to right
  • the second direction Y is from right to left.
  • the pivoting side P is the right pivoting side P2 (That is, when the pivoting side P corresponds to the second door body 205a), the first direction X is from right to left, and the second direction Y is from left to right, that is, corresponding to different pivoting sides P ,
  • the actual directions of the first direction X and the second direction Y are different, and the following description takes the pivoting side P as the left pivoting side P1 as an example.
  • the fixed beam 70a extends to the opening of the box body 10a, and the side of the fixed beam 70a close to the door body 20a is a contact surface 71a with a certain width.
  • the hinge assembly 30a includes a first hinge part 31a fixed to the box body 10a, a second hinge part 32a fixed to the door body 20a, and a switching assembly 40a connecting the first hinge part 31a and the second hinge part 32a.
  • the hinge assembly 30a of this embodiment has the same structure as the hinge assembly 30 in the first embodiment. Therefore, reference may be made to the description of the hinge assembly 30 in the first embodiment.
  • the first hinge member 31a and the switching assembly 40a realize relative movement through the first shaft group 311a, 312a and the first groove body group 411a, 412a that cooperate with each other, and the first shaft group 311a, 312a It includes a first shaft body 311a and a second shaft body 312a.
  • the first groove body group 411a, 412a includes a first free section S1, a second free section S2, and a locking section 4132a, 4142a, 4152a, 4162a, and a first free section S1 Including the initial position A1 and the stopping position A2 which are relatively set, the second free section S2 includes the connected first section L1 and the second section L2.
  • the second hinge member 32a and the switching assembly 40a realize relative movement through the mutually matched second shaft body groups 321a, 322a and the second groove body groups 421a, 422a.
  • the second shaft body groups 321a, 322a include the third shaft body 321a.
  • the fourth shaft 322a, the second slot group 421a, 422a includes a third free section 421a, a fourth free section 4221a, and a limiting section 4222a.
  • the first shaft 311a is located at the initial position A1
  • the second shaft 312a is located at the end of the first section L1 away from the second section L2
  • the fourth shaft 322a is located at the limiting section 4222a so that The switching assembly 40a limits the second hinge member 32a, and both the first door body 204a and the second door body 205a are in contact with the fixed beam 70a.
  • first door body 204a and the second door body 205a may be provided with a door seal on the side close to the box body 10a.
  • the door seal can contact the contact surface 71a of the fixed beam 70a to realize the door body. 20a is completely closed to avoid leakage of cold air in the box 10a.
  • the first shaft body 311a rotates in the initial position A1
  • the second shaft body 312a rotates with the first shaft body 311a is the center of the circle and moves in the first section L1
  • the door body 20a rotates in situ relative to the box body 10a
  • the second shaft 312a moves in the second section L2 to drive the first shaft 311a from the initial position A1 to stop At position A2, the door body 20a moves from the pivoting side P toward the accommodation chamber S.
  • the first shaft body 311a rotates in place at the initial position A1
  • the second shaft body 312a takes the first shaft body 311a as the center of the circle.
  • the door body 20a rotates in situ relative to the box body 10a, and the door body 20a is away from the fixed beam 70a.
  • the door body 20a when the door body 20a is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first intermediate opening angle ⁇ 11, the door body 20a rotates in situ relative to the box body 10a, that is, the door body 20a only rotates without displacement in other directions, which can be effective It is avoided that the door body 20a cannot be opened normally due to the displacement of the door body 20a in a certain direction.
  • the first door body 204a and the second door body 205a will interfere with each other, causing the first door body 204a and the second door body 205a to fail.
  • the first door body 204a and the second door body 205a rotate in situ, which can effectively prevent the adjacent first door body 204a and the second door body 205a from interacting with each other. put one's oar in.
  • the second shaft 312a moves in the second section L2 to drive the first shaft 311a Moving from the initial position A1 to the stopping position A2, the door body 20a moves from the pivoting side P toward the accommodating chamber S.
  • the door body 20a when the door body 20a is in the process of continuing to open from the first intermediate opening angle ⁇ 11 to the first opening angle ⁇ 1, the door body 20a moves toward the side of the accommodating chamber S, that is, the door body 20a is opposite to the box body at this time.
  • 10a rotates, it is displaced in the first direction X relative to the box 10a.
  • the distance that the door 20a protrudes from the box 10a toward the side away from the containing chamber S during the rotation will be greatly reduced, that is, the door
  • the displacement of the body 20a in the first direction X offsets the part of the door body 20a that protrudes from the box body 10a in the second direction Y during the rotation of the door body 20a, thereby preventing the door body 20a from interacting with the surrounding cabinets or walls during the opening process. Interference is suitable for scenes with built-in cabinets or small space for accommodating refrigerator 100a.
  • the fourth shaft body 322a is separated from the limiting section 4222a, and the first shaft body 311a and/ Or the second shaft 312a is limited to the locking segments 4132a, 4142a, 4152a, 4162a, so that the switching assembly 40a limits the first hinge member 31a.
  • the third shaft body 321a rotates in situ in the third free section 421a, and the fourth shaft body 322a With the third shaft body 321a as the center of the circle, it moves on the fourth free section 4221a, and the door body 20a continues to rotate in situ relative to the box body 10a.
  • hinge assembly 30a and the working principle of this embodiment can refer to the first embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 73 are related schematic diagrams of the refrigerator according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
  • the hinge assembly 30b includes a first hinge member 31b fixed to the box body 10b, a second hinge member 32b fixed to the door body 20b, and a switching assembly connecting the first hinge member 31b and the second hinge member 32b 40b.
  • hinge assembly 30b of this embodiment can be applied to the multi-door refrigerator 100 in the first embodiment and the side-by-side refrigerator 100a in the second embodiment, and of course, it can also be other refrigerators.
  • the first hinge member 31b and the switching assembly 40b realize relative movement through the first shaft body 311b and the first groove body 411b that cooperate with each other.
  • the first groove body 411b includes a first free section S1.
  • the second hinge member 32b and the switching assembly 40b realize relative movement through the second shaft group 321b, 322b and the second groove body group 421b, 422b that cooperate with each other.
  • the second shaft group 321b, 322b includes the third shaft body 321b.
  • the fourth shaft 322b, the second slot group 421b, 422b includes a third free section 421b, a fourth free section 4221b and a limiting section 4222b, and the third free section 421b includes a relatively set starting position B1 and a pivoting position B2, the fourth free section 4221b includes a moving section M1 and a rotating section M2 connected in sequence.
  • the first shaft body 311b is located in the first free section S1
  • the fourth shaft body 322b is located in the limiting section 4222b so that the switching assembly 40b is limited to the second hinge Part 32b
  • the third shaft body 321b is located at the starting position B1.
  • the first shaft body 311b rotates in situ in the first free section S1 to drive the door body 20b relative to the box
  • the body 10b rotates in place.
  • the fourth shaft 322b is separated from the limiting section 4222b, and the third shaft 321b remains At the starting position B1, the switching assembly 40b limits the first hinge member 31b.
  • the fourth shaft 322b moves in the moving section M1 to drive the third shaft 321b Moving from the starting position B1 to the pivoting position B2, the door body moves from the pivoting side P toward the receiving chamber S, and then the third shaft body 321b rotates in situ at the pivoting position B2, and the fourth shaft body 322b moves with the third shaft
  • the body 321b is the center of the circle and moves in the rotating section M2, and the door body 20b continues to rotate in situ relative to the box body 10b.
  • the fourth shaft 322b moves in the moving section M1 to drive
  • the third shaft body 321b moves from the starting position B1b to the pivoting position B2, and the door body moves from the pivoting side P toward the accommodating chamber S.
  • the door body 20b when the door body 20b is in the process of continuing to open at the second opening angle ⁇ 2 to the first intermediate opening angle ⁇ 21, the door body 20b moves toward the side of the accommodating chamber S, that is, at this time, the door body 20b is relative to the box body 10b. Displacement occurs in the first direction X. In this way, the distance that the door body 20b protrudes from the box body 10b toward the side away from the containing chamber S during the rotation process will be greatly reduced, that is, the door body 20b is generated along the first direction X.
  • the displacement offsets the part of the door body 20b that protrudes from the box body 10b in the second direction Y during the rotation of the door body 20b, thereby avoiding the door body 20b from interfering with the surrounding cabinets or walls during the opening process. It is suitable for embedded cabinets or accommodating A scene where the refrigerator 100b has a small space.
  • the third shaft body 321b remains at the pivot position B2, and the fourth shaft body 322b moves in the rotating section M2 with the third shaft body 321b as the center, and the door body 20b continues to rotate in situ relative to the box body 10b.
  • the first hinge member 31b includes a first shaft body 311b
  • the switching assembly 40b includes a first groove body 411b, a third shaft body 321b, and a fourth shaft body 322b
  • the second hinge member 32b includes a first shaft body 311b.
  • the third groove body 421b of the three free sections 421b and the fourth groove body 422b having the fourth free section 4221b and the limiting section 4222b.
  • the third groove body 421b includes a starting position B1 and a pivoting position B2 which are arranged oppositely.
  • the tank 422b includes a limiting section 4222b, a moving section M1 and a rotating section M2 which are sequentially connected.
  • the third tank body 421b has an elliptical shape, and the starting position B1 and the pivoting position B2 are the two end points in the direction of the long axis of the ellipse; the limiting section 4222b and the moving section M1 in the fourth tank body 422b And the turning section M2 does not overlap each other.
  • the switching assembly 40b includes a first switching element 401b and a second switching element 402b that cooperate with each other.
  • the first hinge member 31b includes a first limiting portion 314b
  • the first switching member 401b includes a second limiting portion 4016b
  • one of the first limiting portion 314b and the second limiting portion 4016b is a protrusion 314b
  • the other One is a recessed portion 4016b
  • the bump 314b includes a first limiting surface 3141b
  • the recessed portion 4016b includes a second limiting surface 4017b.
  • the recess 4016b is located at the first switching member 401b, and the protrusion 314b is located at the first hinge member 314b.
  • the positions of the bumps 314b and the recesses 4016b can be interchanged, and in addition, other limiting structures can also be used.
  • the first tank body 411b includes a first upper tank body 413b located in the first switching member 401b and a first lower tank body 414b located in the second switching member 402b.
  • the first free section S1 includes a first upper tank body 413b and a first lower tank body 413b. ⁇ 414b.
  • the opening size of the first upper groove body 413b matches with the first shaft body 311b, and the opening size of the first lower groove body 414b is larger than the opening size of the first upper groove body 413b.
  • first upper groove body 413b is circular
  • first lower groove body 414b is elliptical, but not limited to this.
  • the first switching element 401b is closer to the first hinge element 31b than the second switching element 402b, that is, the first hinge element 31b, the first switching element 401b, the second switching element 402b, and the second hinge element 32b Stacked in turn.
  • the first switching member 401b includes a first stop portion 4018b
  • the second switching member 402b includes a second stop portion 4027b that cooperates with the first stop portion 4018b.
  • the second switching member 402b restricts the movement of the first switching member 401b through the cooperation of the second stop portion 4027b and the first stop portion 4018b .
  • the first stop portion 4018b is a groove portion 4018b located on the first switching member 401b
  • the second stop portion 4027b is a protrusion 4027b located on the second switching member 402b
  • one end of the groove portion 4018b stops End 4019b when the door body 20b is in the process of opening from the closed state to the first opening angle ⁇ 1, the first switching member 401b and the second switching member 402b are relatively stationary, and the protrusion 4027b is kept in the groove body portion 4018b away from the stop end
  • the first switching element 401b and the second switching element 402b move relative to each other, and the protrusion 402b is in the groove portion 4018b
  • the inner side moves toward the side close to the stop end 4019b until the protrusion 402b abuts the stop end 4019b, and the first switching element 401b and the second switching
  • the relative movement between the first switching element 401b and the second switching element 402b can be controlled by other structures, for example, through the first switching element 401b and the second switching element 402b.
  • the resistance of the groove body and the first shaft body 311b and the third shaft body 321b causes the first switching element 401b and the second switching element 402b to end the relative movement.
  • the first switching element 401b and the second switching element 402b are held They are relatively static and in a mutually staggered state.
  • the protrusion 402b just abuts the stop end 4019b, but it is not limited to this.
  • the interaction between the protruding portion 402b and the groove portion 4018b mainly plays a role in the closing process of the door body 20b.
  • the door body 20b is in the process of closing from the second opening angle ⁇ 2 to the first opening angle ⁇ 1, because The protrusion 402b abuts against the stop end 4019b.
  • the second switching element 402b does not rotate, the first switching element 401b cannot rotate. That is to say, in this process, the rotation of the first switching element 401b must be later than that of the first switching element 401b.
  • the second switching element 402b rotates, and when the first switching element 401b and the second switching element 402b overlap, they are relatively stationary, and then the first switching element 401b and the second switching element 402b move together relative to the first shaft body 311b until the door The body 20b is closed.
  • the box body 10b includes an outer side surface 13b adjacent to the hinge assembly 30b and on the extension of the rotation path of the door body 20b.
  • the door body 20b includes a front wall 21b away from the containing chamber S and is always sandwiched between the front wall 21b.
  • the side wall 22b between the accommodating chamber S and the front wall 21b has a side edge 23b between the front wall 21b and the side wall 22b.
  • the first switching member 401b and the second switching member 402b are relatively stationary, the first shaft body 311b is located in the first free section S1, and the fourth shaft body 322b is located in the limit position
  • the section 4222b causes the switching assembly 40b to limit the second hinge member 32b, and the third shaft body 321b is located at the initial position B1.
  • the outer side surface 13b and the side wall 22b are located on the same plane, which can ensure the smoothness of the appearance, improve the aesthetics, and also facilitate the installation of the door body 20b, but it is not limited to this.
  • the third shaft body 321b is located at the starting position B1
  • the fourth shaft body 322b is limited in the limit section 4222b
  • the third shaft body 321b and the fourth shaft body The spacing between 322b remains unchanged, and the third shaft body 321b is located at the first switching member 401b, and the fourth shaft body 322b is located at the second switching member 402b, at the common limit of the third shaft body 321b and the fourth shaft body 322b.
  • the first switching element 401b and the second switching element 402b are relatively stationary.
  • the protrusion 314b is located in the recessed portion 4016b, and the first limit surface 3141b is away from the second limit surface 4017b.
  • the door body 20b is opened from the closed state to the first opening angle ⁇ 1
  • the door body 20b drives the switching assembly 40b to move relative to the first hinge member 31b, the convex block 314b moves in the recessed portion 4016b, the first limit surface 3141b and the second
  • the limiting surface 4017b gradually approaches until the first limiting surface 3141b abuts against the second limiting surface 4017b.
  • the first switching member 401b can no longer rotate relative to the first hinge member 31b, that is, the switching assembly 40b realizes the first hinge
  • the locking of the member 31b can control the rotation angle of the door body 20b when the first limiting surface 3141b abuts against the second limiting surface 4017b by controlling the size and shape of the protrusion 314b and the recess 4016b.
  • the door body 20b when the door body 20b is opened to the first opening angle ⁇ 1, the door body 20b rotates in situ relative to the box body 10b to ensure that the door body 20b does not move along the first direction X or the second direction Y during this process. .
  • the distance between the third shaft 321b on the first switching element 401b and the fourth shaft 322b on the second switching element 402b is The third shaft body 321b is always located at the starting position B1, and the fourth shaft body 322b moves from the limit section 4222b to the fourth free section 4221b, that is, the fourth shaft body 322b leaves the limit section 4222b.
  • the locking of the first hinge member 31b is not limited to the cooperation of the protrusion 314b and the recess 4016b.
  • other structures may be used to lock the first hinge member 31b.
  • the first hinge member 31b can be locked by locking the first shaft body 311b.
  • a locking section can be provided at the first groove body 411b. When the first shaft body 311b rotates to the locking section When the first shaft body 311b can be locked, or, the first switching member 401b and the second switching member 402b move relative to each other so that a lock is formed between the first upper groove body 413b and the first lower groove body 414b Section, the locking section can be used to lock the first shaft body 311b.
  • the hinge assembly 30b drives the side edge 23b to move toward the side close to the accommodating chamber S, and the door 20b is opened during the opening process. In this way, interference with surrounding cabinets or walls due to the side ribs 23b protruding from the outer side 13b can be avoided.
  • the side ribs 23b move toward the side closer to the receiving chamber S to the outside.
  • the hinge assembly 30b drives the side edge 23b to move in the plane and gradually approach the containing chamber S.
  • the side rib 23b is made as close to the outer side 13b as possible. In this way, the door 20b can be prevented from contacting the surrounding cabinets during the opening process. Or interference occurs in the wall, and the opening of the box 10b can be ensured as much as possible.
  • the line between the starting position B1 and the pivoting position B2 is parallel to the moving section M1, that is to say, the fourth shaft 322b translates in the moving section M1 to drive the third shaft 321b to start.
  • the starting position B1 is translated to the pivoting position B2.
  • the door body 20b is translated from the pivoting side P toward the containing chamber S.
  • this embodiment can effectively control the sequence switching of the first hinge part 31b and the second hinge part 32b through the unlocking and locking effects of the switching assembly 40b on the first hinge part 31b and the second hinge part 32b, so that the door The body 20b can be stably opened.
  • the center of the third shaft 312b and the side edges 23b are at a fourth distance
  • the center of the third shaft 312b and the front wall 21b are at a fifth distance
  • the center of the third shaft 312b is at a distance from There is a sixth interval between the side walls 22b.
  • the distance change is not limited to the above description.
  • the fifth distance always remains unchanged, and
  • the fourth distance and the sixth distance both show a decreasing trend, then an increasing trend, and then remain unchanged, and so on.
  • FIG. 69 to 73 it is a schematic diagram of a hinge assembly of another embodiment in the third embodiment.
  • the same or similar structures use the same or similar numbers.
  • the difference between this embodiment and the third embodiment is mainly at the second hinge member 32b'.
  • the description of the first hinge member 31b' can refer to the third embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
  • the second hinge member 32b' includes a third slot body 421bb' and a fourth slot body 422b'.
  • the third slot body 421b' includes a starting position B1' and a pivoting position B2' that are oppositely disposed
  • the fourth slot body 422b' includes The limiting section 4222b', the moving section M1' and the rotating section M2' are sequentially connected.
  • the third tank body 421b' is elliptical, the moving section M1' is arc-shaped, and the limiting section 4222b', the moving section M1' and the rotating section M2' do not overlap with each other.
  • the third slot body 421b' is elliptical
  • the third shaft 321b' moves along a straight line in the third slot body 421b'
  • the "moving section M1' is arc-shaped” means that The fourth shaft 322b' moves along an arc in the moving section M1', that is, the fourth shaft 322b' rotates in the moving section M1' to drive the third shaft 321b' from the starting position B1 'Translate to pivot position B2'.
  • the first switching element 401b' and the second switching element 402b' are relatively stationary,
  • the third axle body 321b' is located at the initial position B1', and the fourth axle body 322b' is located at the limiting section 4222b' to limit the second hinge member 32b'.
  • the first switching member 401b' and the second switching member 402b' move relative to each other so that the fourth shaft 322b 'Leaving the limit section 4222b', the third shaft body 321b' is kept at the starting position B1'.
  • the first switching member 401b' and the second switching member 402b' are relatively stationary, and the fourth shaft body 322b Rotating in the moving section M1' drives the third shaft body 321b' to translate from the starting position B1' to the pivoting position B2', and the door body moves from the pivoting side P toward the containing chamber S.
  • the first switching member 401b' and the second switching member 402b' are relatively stationary, and the third shaft body 321b' Keeping at the pivoting position B2', the fourth shaft 322b' moves in the rotating section M2' with the third shaft 321b' as the center, and the door 20b continues to rotate in situ relative to the box 10b.
  • third groove body 421b and the fourth groove body 422b of the present invention can also be in other forms, and only need to ensure that the movement track of the present invention can be realized.
  • the first shaft body 311b and the third shaft body 321b of the present invention are staggered with each other, so that it can be applied to a scene where the space of the built-in cabinet or the refrigerator 100b is small.
  • hinge assembly 30b and the working principle of this embodiment can refer to other embodiments, and will not be repeated here.
  • FIGS. 74 to 96 are related schematic diagrams of the refrigerator according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
  • the hinge assembly 30c includes a first hinge member 31c fixed to the box body 10c, a second hinge member 32c fixed to the door body 20c, and a switching assembly connecting the first hinge member 31c and the second hinge member 32c 40c.
  • hinge assembly 30c of this embodiment can be applied to the multi-door refrigerator 100 in the first embodiment and the side-by-side refrigerator 100a in the second embodiment. Of course, it can also be other refrigerators.
  • the box body 10c includes an outer side surface 13c adjacent to the hinge assembly 30c and on the extension section of the rotation path of the door body 20c.
  • the door 20c includes a front wall 21c away from the containing chamber S and a side wall 22c always sandwiched between the front wall 21c and the containing chamber S, and a side edge 23c is provided between the front wall 21c and the side wall 22c.
  • the hinge assembly 30c includes a first hinge part 31c fixed to the box body 10c, a second hinge part 32c fixed to the door body 20c, and a switching assembly 40c connecting the first hinge part 31c and the second hinge part 32c.
  • the switch assembly 40c includes a first switch piece 401c and a second switch piece 402c that cooperate with each other.
  • the first switch piece 401c is closer to the first hinge piece 31c than the second switch piece 402c, that is, the first hinge piece 31c and the second hinge piece.
  • the installation sequence between 32c and switch assembly 40c is first hinge 31c, first switch 401c, second switch 402c, and second hinge 32c, first hinge 31c, first switch 401c, second switch
  • the member 402c and the second hinge member 32c are sequentially stacked, but not limited to this.
  • the first switching member 401c, the second switching member 402c, and the second hinge member 32c are relatively stationary and move together relative to the first hinge member 31c, and the door The body 20c rotates in situ relative to the box body 10c.
  • the first switching member 401c and the first hinge member 31c are relatively stationary, and the second The switching member 402c and the second hinge member 32c are relatively stationary and move together relative to the first switching member 401c.
  • the door body 20c moves from the pivoting side P toward the containing chamber S.
  • the door body 20c When the door body 20c is at the second opening angle ⁇ 2, it continues to open to During the process of the maximum opening angle ⁇ 3, the first hinge member 31c, the first switching member 401c, and the second switching member 402c are relatively stationary, the second hinge member 32c moves relative to the second switching member 402c, and the door body 20c continues relative to the box body 10c Rotate in place.
  • connecting the first hinge member 31c and the second hinge member 32c through the switching assembly 40c enables the door body 20c to switch the rotation axis during the opening process.
  • the door body 20c is opened from the closed state to the first opening angle ⁇ 1.
  • the in-situ rotation axis generated in the process is different from the in-situ rotation axis generated in the process of opening the door body 20c from the second opening angle ⁇ 2 to the maximum opening angle ⁇ 3.
  • the rotation axis can be switched
  • the movement track of the door 20c is changed so that the refrigerator 100c can adapt to embedded application scenarios.
  • the door 20c of this embodiment moves from the pivoting side P toward the accommodating chamber S during the opening process, which can prevent the door 20c from moving It interferes with surrounding cabinets or walls during the opening process, which is further applicable to scenarios where the space for built-in cabinets or accommodating refrigerator 100c is small.
  • hinge assembly 30c refer to the subsequent description.
  • the first hinge member 31c includes a first shaft body 311c, and the first shaft body 311c extends vertically.
  • the first switching member 401c includes a third shaft body 321c and a first upper groove body 413c.
  • the third shaft body 321c is located on the side of the first switching member 401c close to the second switching member 402c, the third shaft body 321c extends vertically, the first upper groove body 413c has a through hole structure, and the first upper groove body 413c is circular
  • the opening size of the first upper groove body 413c is adapted to the outer diameter of the first shaft body 311c, so that the first shaft body 311c can only rotate but cannot move in the first upper groove body 413c.
  • the second switching element 402c includes a fourth shaft 322c and a through hole 4026c.
  • the fourth shaft body 322c is located on the side of the second switching member 402c close to the second hinge member 32c, the fourth shaft body 322c extends vertically, the through hole 4026c is elliptical, and the through hole 4026c includes a relatively set initial position A1 and a stop The position A2, the initial position A1 and the stop position A2 are the two end points in the direction of the long axis of the ellipse.
  • the second switching member 402c also includes a first lower groove 414c, and the first shaft 311c passes through the first upper groove in turn 413c and the first lower groove body 414c.
  • the first lower groove body 414c is elliptical.
  • the first lower groove body 414c includes a first end B1 and a second end B2 that are oppositely arranged.
  • the first end B1 and the second end B2 are elliptical At the two end points of the long axis direction, the first lower groove body 414c is parallel to the through hole 4026c.
  • the second hinge member 32c includes a third groove 421c and a fourth groove 422c.
  • the second hinge member 32c may be a shaft sleeve that fits with the door body 20c
  • the third groove body 421c is oval
  • the third groove body 421c includes a starting position C1 and a pivoting position C2 that are set oppositely
  • the starting position C1 And the pivot position C2 are the two end points of the long axis of the ellipse.
  • the fourth groove body 422c includes a rotation start position D1 and a rotation stop position D2 that are set oppositely.
  • the fourth groove body 422c is a circular arc groove
  • the fourth groove body 422c is a circular arc groove.
  • the center of the circle is the pivot position C2 of the third groove body 421c.
  • the first hinge member 31c includes a first limiting portion 314c
  • the first switching member 401c includes a second limiting portion 4016c, a first limiting portion 314c, and a second limiting portion 314c.
  • One of the positioning portions 4016c is a bump 314c, and the other is a depression 4016c.
  • the bump 314c includes a first limiting surface 3141c
  • the depression 4016c includes a second limiting surface 4017c.
  • the recess 4016c is located at the first switching member 401c, and the protrusion 314c is located at the first hinge member 314c.
  • the positions of the convex block 314c and the concave portion 4016c can be interchanged, or other limiting structures can also be used.
  • first hinge member 31c further includes a first engaging portion 315c and a second engaging portion 316c
  • first switching member 401c includes a third engaging portion 405c
  • the first engaging portion 315c and the second engaging portion 316c are both Being a notch
  • the third engaging portion 405c includes a third elastic member 4052c and a third boss 4051c.
  • the side of the first switching member 401c close to the first hinge member 31c is provided with a first special-shaped groove 4053c
  • the third elastic member 4052c and the third boss 4051c are limited to the first special-shaped groove 4053c
  • the inner wall of the first special-shaped groove 4053c A first locking portion 4054c is provided.
  • the outer wall of the third boss 4051c is provided with a first rib 4055c that cooperates with the first locking portion 4054c.
  • the first switching member 401c includes a fourth engaging portion 4031c and a fifth engaging portion 4032c
  • the second switching member 402c includes a sixth engaging portion 404c
  • the sixth engaging portion 404c includes a sixth elastic member 4042c and a sixth boss 4041c.
  • the side of the second switching member 402c close to the first switching member 401c is provided with a second special-shaped groove 4043c
  • the sixth elastic member 4042c and the sixth boss 4041c are limited to the second special-shaped groove 4043c
  • the inner wall of the second special-shaped groove 4043c A second locking portion 4044c is provided.
  • the outer wall of the sixth boss 4041c is provided with a second rib 4045c that cooperates with the second locking portion 4044c.
  • the first switching member 401c and the second switching member 402c are also matched by the fifth shaft body 50c, the sixth groove body 418c and the fifth groove body 417c, and the sixth groove body 418c is located in the first switching member 401c, the sixth groove body 418c and the fifth shaft body 417c are matched with each other, the fifth groove body 417c is located in the second switching member 402c, and the fifth groove body 417c includes a third end E1 and a fourth end E2 that are oppositely disposed.
  • the body 417c is parallel to the through hole 4026c, and the fifth groove body 417c has an elliptical shape, and the third end E1 and the fourth end E2 are two end points in the long axis direction of the ellipse.
  • the fifth shaft body 50c is a structure with a larger size at both ends and a smaller middle size.
  • the fifth shaft body 50c sequentially passes through the sixth groove body 418c and the fifth groove body 417c, and the fifth shaft body 50c has two larger sizes.
  • the ends are respectively located on the upper side of the first switching element 401c and the lower side of the second switching element 402c. In this way, the relative movement of the first switching element 401c and the second switching element 402c can be realized, and the first switching element 401c and the second switching element 401c can be moved relative to each other.
  • the pieces 402c are not separated from each other. In other embodiments, the fifth shaft 50c and the first switching piece 401c can be fixed to each other.
  • the first shaft body 311c extends to the first upper groove body 413c, and the third shaft body 321c sequentially Passes through the through hole 4026c and the third groove body 421c, and the third shaft body 321c is located at the initial position A1 and the starting position C1, and the fourth shaft body 322c is located at the rotation starting position D1 of the fourth groove body 422c.
  • the first The shaft body 311c also extends to the first lower groove body 414c and is located at the first end B1, and the fifth shaft body 50c is located at the third end E1 of the fifth groove body 417c.
  • the first limiting surface 3141c of the first limiting portion 314c is far away from the second limiting surface 4017c of the second limiting portion 4016c.
  • the third engaging portion 405c is limited to the first engaging portion 315c, that is, the third elastic member 4052c acts on the third boss 4051c to be limited to the first engaging portion 315c. At this time, the third engaging portion 405c and the first engaging portion 315c The engaging portion 315c can be used as a closing member to assist in improving the closing effect of the door body 20c.
  • the sixth engaging portion 404c is limited to the fourth engaging portion 4031c, that is, the sixth elastic member 4042c acts on the sixth boss 4041c to be limited to the fourth engaging portion 4031c. At this time, the sixth engaging portion 404c is engaged with the fourth engaging portion 4031c.
  • the parts 4031c can cooperate with each other to assist in realizing the relative static of the first switching element 401c and the second switching element 42c.
  • the outer side surface 13c and the side wall 22c are located on the same plane, which can ensure the smoothness of the appearance, improve the aesthetics, and facilitate the installation of the door body 20c, but it is not limited to this.
  • the first shaft body 311c is held at the first end B1 of the first lower groove body 414c, and the third shaft body 321c is held at the initial position A1 and the starting position C1, the fourth shaft 322c is maintained at the rotation starting position D1, and the fifth shaft 50c is held at the third end E1 of the fifth groove body 417c.
  • the third shaft body 321c is located at the initial position A1 and the starting position C1 at the same time, the fourth shaft body 322c is located at the rotation starting position D1, and the third shaft body 321c and the fourth shaft body The distance between 322c remains unchanged, and the third shaft 321c is located at the first switching member 401c, and the fourth shaft 322c is located at the second switching member 402c, and is limited in common between the third shaft 321c and the fourth shaft 322c.
  • the first switching element 401c and the second switching element 402c are relatively stationary, and since the fourth groove body 422c is a circular arc groove centered on the pivot position C2 of the third groove body 421c, when the third shaft body 321c is located At the initial position C1, the fourth shaft 322c will not move in the fourth slot 422c, that is, the second hinge member 32c, the first switching member 401c, and the second switching member 402c remain relatively stationary at the same time. At this time, the user implements When force is applied to the door body 20c to drive the door body 20c to open, the first switching member 401c, the second switching member 402c, and the second hinge member 32c are relatively stationary and move together relative to the first hinge member 31c.
  • the door body 20c when the door body 20c is opened to the first opening angle ⁇ 1, the door body 20c rotates in situ relative to the box body 10c to ensure that the door body 20c does not move along the first direction X or the second direction Y during this process. .
  • the switching assembly 40c limits the second hinge member 32c.
  • the protrusion 314c is located in the recessed portion 4016c, and the first limit surface 3141c is away from the second limit surface 4017c.
  • the door body 20c is opened from the closed state to the first opening angle ⁇ 1
  • the first hinge member 31c is fixed to the box body 10c, and the door body 20c drives the first switching member 401c, the second switching member 402c, and the second hinge member 32c to move together relative to the first hinge member 31c, and the protrusion 314c is in the recess
  • the first limiting surface 3141c and the second limiting surface 4017c gradually approach until the first limiting surface 3141c abuts against the second limiting surface 4017c.
  • the first switching element 401c can no longer be opposed to the first hinge
  • the member 31c rotates, that is, the switch assembly 40c realizes the locking of the first hinge member 31c.
  • the first limit surface 3141c can be controlled to abut the second limit surface 4017c by controlling the size and shape of the convex block 314c and the concave portion 4016c. The rotation angle of the door body 20c at the time.
  • the third engaging portion 405c separates from the first engaging portion 315c, and the third engaging portion 405c and the second engaging portion 316c gradually approach until the third engaging portion 405c is limited to the second card
  • the engaging portion 316c specifically, the bottom surface of the first hinge member 31c abuts against the third boss 4051c to drive the third elastic member 4052c to compress, and when the third boss 4051c contacts the second engaging portion 316c, the third The elastic member 4052c is reset to drive the third boss 4051c to enter the second engaging portion 316c, which can further restrict the first switching member 401c from continuing to rotate relative to the first hinge member 31c.
  • the double limit prevents the first switching member 401c from continuing to rotate relative to the first hinge member 31c. It is understood that the limit of the first limit surface 3141c and the second limit surface 4017c can also be omitted at this time, that is, in other implementations In this manner, the first limiting portion 314c and the second limiting portion 4016c can be omitted.
  • the sixth engaging portion 404c and the fourth engaging portion 4031c always maintain mutual restraint to assist in realizing the relative static of the first switching element 401c and the second switching element 42c.
  • the fourth shaft 322c remains at the rotation starting position D1, and the first shaft 311c moves from the first end B1 To the second end B2, the third shaft 321c moves from the initial position A1 to the stop position A2, while the third shaft 321c moves from the starting position C1 to the pivoting position C2, and the fifth shaft 50c moves from the third end E1 To the fourth end E2, in this way, the door body 20c can be moved from the pivoting side P toward the accommodation chamber S.
  • the first limiting surface 3141c abuts against the second limiting surface 4017c so that the first switching member 401c can no longer move relative to the first hinge member 31c, and/or
  • the third engaging portion 405c and the second engaging portion 316c are mutually restricted so that the first switching element 401c can no longer move relative to the first hinge element 31c, that is, the first hinge element 31c and the first switching element 401c are relatively stationary at this time.
  • the position C2 is a circular arc groove with the center of the circle.
  • the fourth shaft body 322c will not move in the fourth groove body 422c, that is, the second switching member 402c and the second hinge member 32c Relatively stationary, then, at this time, the user's force will drive the first whole formed by the second switching member 402c and the second hinge member 32c to move relative to the second whole formed by the first switching member 401c and the first hinge member 31c, that is, this At this time, the second switching element 402c moves relative to the first switching element 401c.
  • the through hole 4026c at the second switching member 402c, the first lower groove body 414c, and the fifth groove body 417c are all elliptical and parallel to each other, and the door body 20c continues to open from the first opening angle ⁇ 1 to the second opening angle ⁇ 1.
  • the second switching member 402c moves relative to the first switching member 401c
  • the first shaft body 311c moves from the first end B1 of the first lower groove body 414c to the second end B2
  • the third shaft body 321c From the initial position A1 of the through hole 4026c to the stop position A2, the third shaft body 321c also moves from the starting position C1 of the third groove body 421c to the pivoting position C2, and the fifth shaft body 50c is moved by the fifth groove body 417c.
  • the third end E1 moves to the fourth end E2.
  • the second switching element 402c has moved a certain distance relative to the first switching element 401c, and the second switching element 402c and the second hinge element 32c are both connected to the door
  • the body 20c is relatively stationary, which is equivalent to a certain distance movement of the door body 20c relative to the box body 10c at this time. Specifically, the door body 20c moves from the pivoting side P toward the containing chamber S to avoid the door body 20c and the surrounding cabinets or walls. Body, etc. interfere.
  • the hinge assembly 30c drives the side edge 23c to move toward the side close to the receiving chamber S, and the door body 20c is opened during the opening process. In this way, interference with surrounding cabinets or walls due to the side ribs 23c protruding from the outer side 13c can be avoided.
  • the through hole 4026c, the first lower groove body 414c, and the fifth groove body 417c in this embodiment are all elliptical and parallel to each other.
  • the second switching member 402c essentially translates relative to the first switching member 401c and drives the door body 20c to translate relative to the box body 10c.
  • the through hole 4026c and the first lower groove body The 414c and the fifth trough body 417c can also be in other forms.
  • the through hole 4026c, the first lower trough body 414c and the fifth trough body 417c are arc-shaped, and the second switching member 402c rotates relative to the first switching member 401c to drive the door.
  • the 20c rotates relative to the box 10c, and the door 20c moves from the pivoting side P toward the containing chamber S for a certain distance during the rotation.
  • the fifth engaging portion 4032c and the sixth engaging portion 404c gradually approach until the sixth engaging portion 404c is limited to
  • the fifth engaging portion 4032c restricts the relative movement of the first switching element 401c and the second switching element 402c.
  • the second switching element 402c moves relative to the first switching element 401c to drive the sixth engaging portion 404c to disengage from the fourth engaging portion 4031c, and then the first switching element 401c approaches the second switching element 402c.
  • the bottom surface abuts the sixth boss 4041c to drive the sixth elastic member 4041c to compress, and when the sixth boss 4041c contacts the fifth engaging portion 4032c, the sixth elastic member 4041c resets and drives the sixth boss 4041c into the fifth card ⁇ 4032c.
  • the first shaft body 311c is held at the second end B2 of the first lower groove body 414c, and the third shaft body 321c is held In the stop position A2 and the pivot position C2, the fifth shaft body 50c is held at the fourth end E2 of the fifth groove body 417c, and the fourth shaft body 322c moves from the rotation start position D1 to the rotation stop position D2. In this way, it can be realized The door body 20c continues to rotate in situ relative to the box body 10c.
  • the first switching element 401c and the second switching element 402c are relatively static, and the first switching element 401c and the first hinge part 31c are relatively static, and the user continues to open at this time
  • the second hinge member 32c can move relative to the second switching member 402c, and the third shaft body 321c is at the pivoting position C2, and the fourth shaft body 322c is at the beginning of the rotation of the fourth groove body 422c.
  • the fourth slot body 422c is a circular arc slot with the center of the third slot body 421c pivoting position C2, when the user continues to open the door body 20c, the third shaft body 321c will remain at the pivot position C2, and the fourth The shaft 322c moves from the rotation start position D1 of the fourth slot body 422c to the rotation stop position D2. During the opening process, the door body 20c continues to rotate in situ relative to the box body 10c.
  • this embodiment can effectively control the sequence switching of the first hinge member 31c and the second hinge member 32c, so that the door body 20c can be stably opened, and the refrigerator 100c can be adapted to embedded application scenarios.
  • the first switching element 401c and the second switching element 402c are mutually restricted by the sixth engaging portion 404c and the fifth engaging portion 4032c.
  • the force required for the six engaging portion 404c to disengage from the fifth engaging portion 4032c is the first force
  • the third engaging portion 405c and the second engaging portion 316c are passed between the first switching member 401c and the first hinge member 31c.
  • the force required for the third engaging portion 405c to separate from the second engaging portion 316c is the second force.
  • the size of the first force and the second force can be controlled by the structure setting.
  • the first force is smaller than the second force.
  • the door body 20c can first realize the resetting of the second switching element 402c and the first switching element 401c during the closing process, and then realize the first switching element 401c and the second switching element 401c.
  • the resetting of a hinge member 31c of course, in other embodiments, the resetting sequence during the closing process can also be controlled in other ways.
  • the initial position A1 of the through hole 4026c is farther away from the outer surface 13c of the box body 10c than the stop position A2.
  • the third shaft body 321c There is a fourth interval between the center and the side edges 23c, and the sixth interval between the center of the third shaft body 321c and the side wall 22c.
  • the fourth distance and the sixth distance both show a decreasing trend, that is, when the door body 20c is in the process of continuing to open from the first opening angle ⁇ 1 to the second opening angle ⁇ 2, the second switching member 402c Relative to the movement of the first switching member 401c, the third shaft body 321c moves in the through hole 4026c and the third groove body 421c so that the distance between the center of the third shaft body 321c and the side edge 23c and the side wall 22c changes.
  • the change in the fourth and sixth intervals is reflected in that the door body 20c moves a certain distance from the pivoting side P toward the receiving chamber S. In this way, the door body 20c can be prevented from interfering with the surrounding cabinets or walls during the opening process. .
  • the initial position A1 of the through hole 4026c is farther from the front end surface 103c than the stop position A2.
  • the center of the third shaft body 321c and the front wall 21c are between The fifth distance, when the door body 20c is in the process of continuing to open from the first opening angle ⁇ 1 to the second opening angle ⁇ 2, the fifth distance has an increasing trend.
  • the change of the fifth distance is reflected in the door body 20c moving away from The front end surface 103c of the box body 10c moves a certain distance, so that when the door body 20c is provided with a door seal on the side close to the box body 10c, the door body 20c can be prevented from squeezing the door seal during the opening process, thereby avoiding damage to the door.
  • the fifth distance can also be kept unchanged.
  • the first shaft body 311c and the third shaft body 321c of the present invention are staggered from each other, so that it can be applied to a scene where a built-in cabinet or a refrigerator 100c is small.
  • hinge assembly 30c and the working principle of this embodiment, reference may be made to other embodiments, which will not be repeated here.
  • the refrigerator 100 is a refrigerator 100 with a wiring module 60.
  • the wiring module 60 includes a fixed end 61 and a free end 62 that are arranged oppositely.
  • the fixed end 61 is connected to the door body 20.
  • the free end 62 is movably arranged on the box body 10.
  • the wiring E of the box body 10 passes through the free end 62 and the fixed end in turn.
  • the end 61 extends to the door body 20.
  • the free end 62 is movably arranged on the box body 10
  • the free end 62 and the box body 10 are not fixed.
  • the wire E in the wire module 60 can also move freely as the door 20 is opened.
  • the wiring E of this embodiment extends to the door 20 through the wiring module 60, which can effectively avoid the phenomenon that the wiring E is pulled during the opening and closing process of the door 20, and can be adapted to The door body 20 with various motion trajectories, for example, when the hinge assembly 30 drives the door body 20 to move from the pivoting side P toward the accommodating chamber S, the extension trajectory of the wiring E will also change.
  • the wiring module 60 is used. The design can be fully adapted to this movement of the door body 20, and the extension track of the wiring E can be flexibly adjusted by the wiring module 60 to avoid wire jamming.
  • the refrigerator 100 further includes a limiting space 101.
  • the limiting space 101 includes a notch 1011 disposed toward the door body 20.
  • the fixed end 61 of the cable routing module 60 passes through the notch 1011 to connect to the door body 20.
  • the door body 20 drives the wire routing module 60 to move in the limiting space 101, and the free end 62 is always located in the limiting space 101.
  • the limiting space 101 is located at the top 11 of the box body 10, the wiring module 60 is arranged parallel to the top 11 of the box body 10, and the fixed end 61 is movably connected to the door body 20.
  • the limiting space 101 can also be set in other areas .
  • the wiring module 60 includes a first housing 601 and a second housing 602.
  • the second housing 602 is disposed adjacent to the top 11 of the box 10, and the first housing 601 is opposite to the second housing 602. 602 is away from the top 11 of the box 10, the first housing 601 and the second housing 602 cooperate with each other to form an accommodating cavity 603 for accommodating the wire E.
  • the two ends of the accommodating cavity 603 are opened as a fixed end 61 and a free end 62.
  • the door body 20 protrudes upwards from the top 11 of the box body 10.
  • the edge of the top 11 close to the door 20 is provided with a stop 111 protruding from the top 11, and the stop 111 is provided with a notch 1011.
  • the refrigerator 100 includes a protrusion A plurality of protrusions 112 of the top portion 11 are formed, and the plurality of protrusions 112 are enclosed to form a limiting space 101.
  • the first hinge member 31 is fixed at the edge position of the top 11, and in order to adapt to the design of the door body 20 protruding from the top 11, the first hinge member 31 of the hinge assembly 30 is roughly Z-shaped.
  • the first hinge member 31 It can be extended from the top 11 of the box body 10 to the top of the door body 20 to be compatible with the switching assembly 40 on the top of the door body 20, and the plurality of protrusions 112 include a first hinge between the first hinge part 31 and the cable routing module 60.
  • the protruding portion 1121 and the second protruding portion 1122 are spaced apart from the first protruding portion 1121.
  • the first protruding portion 1121 can prevent the wiring module 60 from interfering with the first hinge member 31, and the outline of the first protruding portion 1121 and the wiring
  • the movement trajectory of the module 60 is adapted, and the second protrusion 1122 may be a plurality of protrusions to reduce the collision between the wiring module 60 and the second protrusion 1122.
  • the refrigerator 100 may further include a cover body 103, which is located on the top 11 and covers the limiting space 101, the first hinge member 31, etc.
  • the cover body 103 can be adapted to the stop 111, and the shape of the cover body 103 can be adjusted according to It depends on specific needs.
  • the fixed end 61 and the notch 1011 of the cable routing module 60 are located close to the hinge assembly 30. It can be understood that during the opening process of the door body 20, the cable routing module 60 will be exposed in the opening gap of the door body 20, and the fixed end 61 and the notch 1011 are arranged close to the hinge assembly 30. On the one hand, the movement trajectory of the wiring module 60 can be reasonably controlled, and on the other hand, it can prevent the wiring module 60 from affecting the appearance and normal use of the refrigerator 100.
  • the wiring module 60 is arranged horizontally and extends through the slot 1011 to the door body 20.
  • the door body 20 is provided with a wiring hole H, and the wiring E extends from the fixed end 61 and extends from the wiring hole H to the door body 20 Inside, the area C adjacent to the wiring hole H is pivotally connected to the fixed end 61 area, and the door body 20 includes a cover 24 covering the fixed end 61, the wiring hole H and the area C.
  • the wiring module 60 can be realized
  • the wiring module 60 includes a circular arc segment D, which can further prevent the wiring E from being disturbed inside the receiving cavity 603.
  • a buffer member or sliding member, etc. can be provided between the second housing 602 of the wiring module 60 and the top 11 of the box body 10, which may be based on actual conditions. It depends on the situation.
  • the notch 1011 of the limiting space 101 has a first notch width
  • the wiring module 60 includes a movable portion 63 located between the fixed end 61 and the free end 62, and the first notch width is larger than the movable portion 63 The maximum width.
  • the movable portion 63 gradually protrudes out of the limiting space 101, and the width of the first notch is greater than the maximum width of the movable portion 63, which can prevent the notch 1011 from restricting the protruding limit of the movable portion 63.
  • the position space 101 and the notch 1011 can control the movement trajectory of the wiring module 60 to a certain extent, so as to prevent the wiring module 60 from moving out of the limit space 101 due to excessive movement.
  • the free end 62 may be arranged in a bent shape, that is, an included angle is formed between the free end 62 and the movable portion 63.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
  • Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
  • Combustion & Propulsion (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Thermal Sciences (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Refrigerator Housings (AREA)
  • Hinge Accessories (AREA)
  • Devices That Are Associated With Refrigeration Equipment (AREA)

Abstract

一种嵌入式冰箱(100),包括箱体(10)、用以打开和关闭箱体(10)的门体(20)以及连接箱体(10)及门体(20)的铰链组件(30)。箱体(10)包括容纳腔室及连接铰链组件(30)的枢转侧,铰链组件(30)包括第一铰链件(31)、第二铰链件(32)以及连接第一铰链件(31)、第二铰链件(32)的切换组件(40)。当门体(20)处于开启过程中,第一铰链件(31)先相对切换组件(40)运动,而后第二铰链件(31)相对切换组件(40)运动,其中铰链组件(30)先驱动门体(20)相对箱体(10)原地转动,再驱动门体(20)由枢轴侧朝向容纳腔室移动,而后再驱动门体(20)相对箱体(10)继续原地转动。该冰箱可提高门体(20)开闭的自由度,且可产生多种运动轨迹以适应不同的应用场景。

Description

嵌入式冰箱
本申请要求了申请日为2019年08月28日,申请号为201910803434.8,发明名称为“嵌入式冰箱”、申请日为2019年08月28日,申请号为201910803425.9,发明名称为“嵌入式对开门冰箱”、申请日为2019年08月28日,申请号为201910803437.1,发明名称为“嵌入式多门冰箱”、申请日为2019年08月28日,申请号为201910804444.3,发明名称为“嵌入式冰箱”、申请日为2020年03月16日,申请号为202010179561.8,发明名称为“嵌入式冰箱”、申请日为2020年07月03日,申请号为202010637425.9,发明名称为“门体旋转轴可变的嵌入式冰箱”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本发明涉及家电技术领域,尤其涉及一种嵌入式冰箱。
背景技术
通常情况下,冰箱和门体之间都是通过一个固定的铰链件来实现相对运动,门体的开闭自由度会大大受限,即无法自由控制门体运动轨迹以适应不同的应用场景。
例如,从最近几年来看,随着社会的进步,人们生活水平的提高,对冰箱在家庭的摆放位置与摆放方式越来越被普通用户看重,而针对目前的家装风格,部分家庭追求风格一体化,就需要把冰箱放入橱柜中,构成所谓的嵌入式冰箱装置,所述冰箱称为嵌入式冰箱,目前的冰箱难以适应这种嵌入式应用场景。
有鉴于此,有必要对现有的冰箱予以改进,以解决上述问题。
发明内容
本发明的目的在于提供一种嵌入式冰箱,其可以有效提高门体开闭自由度。
为实现上述发明目的之一,本发明一实施方式提供一种嵌入式冰箱,包括箱体、用以打开和关闭箱体的门体以及连接箱体及门体的铰链组件,箱体包括容纳腔室及连接铰链组件的枢转侧,所述铰链组件包括第一铰链件、第二铰链件以及连接所述第一铰链件及所述第二铰链件的切换组件,当所述门体处于开启过程中时,所述第一铰链件先相对所述切换组件运动,而后所述第二铰链件相对所述切换组件运动,其中,所述铰链组件先驱动所述门体相对所述箱体原地转动,再驱动所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动,而后再驱动所述门体相对所述箱体继续原地转动。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述门体上设有第一配合部,所述箱体上设有第二配合部,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第一配合部与所述第二配合部相互卡合,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述门体相对所述箱体原地转动而带动所述第一配合部脱离所述第二配合部。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述门体包括枢轴连接所述箱体且沿水平方向并排设置的第一门体及第二门体,所述冰箱还包括活动连接于所述第一门体靠近所述第二门体一侧的竖梁,所述第一配合部设置于所述竖梁处,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述竖梁延伸至所述第二门体处,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述门体相对所述箱体原地转动而使得所述竖梁朝靠近所述容纳腔室的一侧转动,所述第一门体与所述竖梁之间具有第一折叠角度,而后所述竖梁与所述第一门体保持相对静止。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一配合部为向上凸伸出所述竖梁的凸块,所述第二配合部为具有缺口的凹槽,所述凸块通过所述缺口进入或脱离所述凹槽。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一铰链件固定于所述箱体,所述第二铰链件固定于所述门体,所述切换组件包括第一配合件及第二配合件,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一铰链件与所述第一配合件相对运动而驱动所述门体相对所述箱体原地转动,而后所述第一铰链件与所述第一配合件相对运动而驱动所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动,且所述第二配合件限位所述第二铰链件,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第二铰链件脱离所述第二配合件的限位,且所述第一配合件限位所述第一铰链件,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第二铰链件与所述第二配合件相对运动而驱动所述门体继续原地转动。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一铰链件固定于所述箱体,所述第二铰链件固定于所述门体,所述切换组件包括第一配合件及第二配合件,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一铰链件与所述第一配合件相对运动而驱动所述门体相对所述箱体原地转动,且所述第二配合件限位所述第二铰链件,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第二铰链件脱离所述第二配合件的限位,且所述第一配合件限位所述第一铰链件,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第二铰链件与所述第二配合件相对运动而驱动所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动,而后所述第二铰链件与所述第二配合件相对运动而驱动所述门体继续原地转动。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述切换组件包括相互配合的第一切换件及第二切换件,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中或是处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件与所述第二切换件相对静止,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件相对所述第二切换件运动而使得所述第二铰链件脱离所述第二配合件的限位,且所述第一配合件限位所述第一铰链件。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一铰链件与所述第一配合件之间通过相互配合的第一轴体组及第一槽体组实现相对运动,所述第二铰链件与所述第二配合件之间通过相互配合的第二轴体组及第二槽体组实现相对运动,所述第一轴体组包括第一轴体及第二轴体,所述第一槽体组包括与所述第一轴体配合的第一槽体及与所述第二轴体配合的第二槽体,所述第二轴体组包括第三轴体及第四轴体,所述第二槽体组包括与所述第三轴体配合的第三槽体及与所述第四轴体配合的第四槽体。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一铰链件包括所述第一轴体及所述第二轴体,所述第一配合件包括所述第一槽体及所述第二槽体,所述第二配合件包括所述第三轴体及所述第四轴体,所述第二铰链件包括所述第三槽体及所述第四槽体。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一槽体包括位于所述第一切换件的第一上槽体及位于所述第二切换件的第一下槽体,所述第一上槽体包括第一上自由段,所述第一下槽体包括第一下自由段,所述第二槽体包括位于所述第一切换件的第二上槽体及位于所述第二切换件的第二下槽体,所述第二上槽体包括第二上自由段,所述第二下槽体包括第二下自由段,所述第三槽体包括第三自由段,所述第四槽体包括第四自由段,所述第一槽体组包括锁止段,所述第二槽体组包括限位段,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件与所述第二切换件相对静止,所述第一上自由段与所述第一下自由段重合形成第一自由段,所述第二上自由段与所述第二下自由段重合形成第二自由段,所述第一轴体于所述第一自由段运动,所述第二轴体于所述第二自由段运动,所述第三轴体和/或所述第四轴体限位于所述限位段而使得所述切换组件限位所述第二铰链件,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件及所述第二切换件相对运动而使得所述第四轴体脱离所述限位段,且所述第一轴体和/或所述第二轴体限位于所述锁止段而使得所述切换组件限位所述第一铰链件,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体于所述第三自由段内运动,所述第四轴体于所述第四自由段运动。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述锁止段包括位于所述第一上槽体的第一上锁止段、位于所述第一下槽体的第一下锁止段、位于所述第二上槽体的第二上锁止段及位于所述第二下槽体的第二下锁止段,所述限位段包括位于所述第四槽体的第四限位段,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第四轴体限位于所述第四限位段,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体同时限位于所述第一上锁止段及所述第一下锁止段,所述第二轴体同时限位于所述第二上锁止段及所述第二下锁止段,且所述第四轴体脱离所述第四限位段。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一上锁止段与所述第一下锁止段始终相互错开,所述第二上锁止段与所述第二下锁止段始终相互错开。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一自由段包括相对设置的初始位置及停止位置,所述第二自由段包括相连的第一段及第二段,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第一轴体位于所述初始位置,所述第二轴体位于所述第一段远离所述第二段的一端,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体于所述初始位置原地转动,所述第二轴体以所述第一轴体为圆心而于所述第一段内运动,而后所述第二轴体于所述第二段内运动而带动所述第一轴体由所述初始位置运动至所述停止位置,所述门体由容纳腔室朝向枢转侧移动,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体于所述第三自由段内原地转动,所述第四轴体以所述第三轴体为圆心而于所述第四自由段运动。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述箱体包括邻近所述铰链组件且在所述门体转动路径延伸段上的外侧面,所述门体包括远离所述容纳腔室的前壁及始终夹设于所述前壁及所述容纳腔室之间的侧壁,所述前壁与所述侧壁之间具有侧棱,所述第一轴体的中心与所述侧棱之间为第一间距,所述第一轴体的中心与所述前壁之间为第二间距,所述第一轴体的中心与所述侧壁之间为第三间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述侧棱之间为第四间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述前壁之间为第五间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述侧壁之间为第六间距,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一间距、所述第二间距及所述第三间距均先保持不变后呈减小趋势,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第四间距、所述第五间距及所述第六间距均保持不变。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第三自由段包括相对设置的起始位置及枢转位置,所述第四自由段包括相连的移动段及转动段,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第二轴体位于所述第二自由段的一端,所述第三轴体位于所述起始位置,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体于所述第一自由段内原地转动,所述第二轴体以所述第一轴体为圆心而于所述第二自由段内运动,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第四轴体于所述移动段内运动而带动所述第三轴体由所述起始位置运动至所述枢转位置,所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动,而后所述第三轴体于所述枢转位置原地转动,所述第四轴体以所述第三轴体为圆心而于所述转动段运动。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述箱体包括邻近所述铰链组件且在所述门体转动路径延伸段上的外侧面,所述门体包括远离所述容纳腔室的前壁及始终夹设于所述前壁及所述容纳腔室之间的侧壁,所述前壁与所述侧壁之间具有侧棱,所述第一轴体的中心与所述侧棱之间为第一间距,所述第一轴体的中心与所述前壁之间为第二间距,所述第一轴体的中心与所述侧壁之间为第三间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述侧棱之间为第四间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述前壁之间为第五间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述侧壁之间为第六间距,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一间距、所述第二间距及所述第三间距均保持不变,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第四间距、所述第五间距及所述第六间距均先呈减小趋势后保持不变。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一切换件及所述第二切换件通过第五轴体相互配接,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度切换至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体以所述第五轴体为圆心运动至所述锁止段。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一切换件相较于所述第二切换件靠近所述第一铰链件。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一切换件包括所述第三轴体,所述第二切换件具有通孔,所述第三轴体通过所述通孔而延伸至所述第三槽体,所述第二切换件包括所述第四轴体,所述第四轴体延伸至所述第四槽体。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述箱体包括开口及环绕所述开口设置的前端面,所述第一轴体与所述前端面之间具有第一距离,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体与所述前端面之间具有第二距离,所述第二距离大于所述第一距离。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述冰箱还包括邻近铰链组件且在门体转动路径延伸段上的外侧面,所述第一轴体与所述外侧面之间具有第三距离,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体与所述外侧面之间具有第四距离,所述第四距离小于所述第三距离。
为实现上述发明目的之一,本发明一实施方式提供一种嵌入式冰箱,其特征在于,包括箱体、用以打开和关闭所述箱体的门体以及连接所述箱体及所述门体的铰链组件,所述箱体包括连接所述铰链组件的枢转侧、容纳腔室以及将所述容纳腔室分隔为第一间室及第二间室的固定梁,所述门体包括对应所述第一间室设置的第一门体及对应所述第二间室设置的第二门体,所述铰链组件包括固定于所述箱体的第一铰链件、固定于所述门体的第二铰链件以及连接所述第一铰链件及所述第二铰链件的切换组件,所述第一铰链件与所述切换组件之间通过相互配合的第一轴体组及第一槽体组实现相对运动,所述第一轴体组包括第一轴体及第二轴体,所述第一槽体组包括第一自由段、第二自由段及锁止段,所述第一自由段包括相对设置的初始位置及停止位置,所述第二自由段包括相连的第一段及第二段,所述第二铰链件与所述切换组件之间通过相互配合的第二轴体组及第二槽体组实现相对运动,所述第二轴体组包括第三轴体及第四轴体,所述第二槽体组包括第三自由段、第四自由段及限位段,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第一轴体位于所述初始位置,所述第二轴体位于所述第一段远离所述第二段的一端,且所述第四轴体位于所述限位段而使得所述切换组件限位所述第二铰链件,所述第一门体及所述第二门体均与所述固定梁接触,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体于所述初始位置原地转动,所述第二轴体以所述第一轴体为圆心而于所述第一段内运动,所述门体相对所述箱体原地转动,而后所述第二轴体于所述第二段内运动而带动所述第一轴体由所述初始位置运动至所述停止位置,所述门体由容纳腔室朝向枢转侧移动,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第四轴体脱离所述限位段,且所述第一轴体和/或所述第二轴体限位于所述锁止段而使得所述切换组件限位所述第一铰链件,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体于所述第三自由段内原地转动,所述第四轴体以所述第三轴体为圆心而于所述第四自由段运动,所述门体相对所述箱体继续原地转动。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述箱体包括邻近所述铰链组件且在所述门体转动路径延伸段上的外侧面,所述门体包括远离所述容纳腔室的前壁及始终夹设于所述前壁及所述容纳腔室之间的侧壁,所述前壁与所 述侧壁之间具有侧棱,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述侧棱运动至位于所述外侧面靠近所述容纳腔室的一侧。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一铰链件包括所述第一轴体及所述第二轴体,所述切换组件包括具有所述第一自由段的第一槽体、具有所述第二自由段的第二槽体、所述第三轴体及所述第四轴体,所述第二铰链件包括具有所述第三自由段的第三槽体及具有所述第四自由段的第四槽体。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述切换组件包括相互配合的第一切换件及第二切换件,所述第一槽体包括位于所述第一切换件的第一上槽体及位于所述第二切换件的第一下槽体,所述第一自由段包括位于所述第一上槽体的第一上自由段及位于所述第一下槽体的第一下自由段,所述第二槽体包括位于所述第一切换件的第二上槽体及位于所述第二切换件的第二下槽体,所述第二自由段包括位于所述第二上槽体的第二上自由段及位于所述第二下槽体的第二下自由段,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件与所述第二切换件相对静止,所述第一上自由段与所述第一下自由段重合形成所述第一自由段,所述第二上自由段与所述第二下自由段重合形成所述第二自由段,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件相对所述第二切换件运动而使得所述第四轴体脱离所述限位段,且所述第一轴体和/或所述第二轴体限位于所述锁止段,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件与所述第二切换件相对静止。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述锁止段包括连通所述第一上自由段的第一上锁止段、连通所述第一下自由段的第一下锁止段、连通所述第二上自由段的第二上锁止段及连通所述第二下自由段的第二下锁止段,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体同时限位于所述第一上锁止段及所述第一下锁止段,所述第二轴体同时限位于所述第二上锁止段及所述第二下锁止段。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一上锁止段与所述第一下锁止段始终相互错开,所述第二上锁止段与所述第二下锁止段始终相互错开。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一轴体的中心与所述侧棱之间为第一间距,所述第一轴体的中心与所述前壁之间为第二间距,所述第一轴体的中心与所述侧壁之间为第三间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述侧棱之间为第四间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述前壁之间为第五间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述侧壁之间为第六间距,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一间距、所述第二间距及所述第三间距均先保持不变后呈减小趋势,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第四间距、所述第五间距及所述第六间距均保持不变。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一切换件及所述第二切换件通过第五轴体相互配接,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体以所述第五轴体为圆心运动至所述锁止段。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一切换件相较于所述第二切换件靠近所述第一铰链件。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一切换件包括所述第三轴体,所述第二切换件具有通孔,所述第三轴体通过所述通孔而延伸至所述第三槽体,所述第二切换件包括所述第四轴体,所述第四轴体延伸至所述第四槽体。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述箱体包括开口及环绕所述开口设置的前端面,所述第一轴体与所述前端面之间具有第一距离,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体与所述前端面之间具有第二距离,所述第二距离大于所述第一距离。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述冰箱还包括邻近铰链组件且在门体转动路径延伸段上的外侧面,所述第一轴体与所述外侧面之间具有第三距离,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体与所述外侧面之间具有第四距离,所述第四距离小于所述第三距离。
为实现上述发明目的之一,本发明一实施方式提供一种嵌入式冰箱,包括箱体、用以打开和关闭所述箱体的门体以及连接所述箱体及所述门体的铰链组件,箱体包括容纳腔室及连接铰链组件的枢转侧,所述门体上设有第一配合部,所述箱体上设有第二配合部,所述铰链组件包括固定于所述箱体的第一铰链件、固定于所述门体的第二铰链件以及连接所述第一铰链件及所述第二铰链件的切换组件,所述第一铰链件与所述切换组件之间通过相互配合的第一轴体组及第一槽体组实现相对运动,所述第一轴体组包括第一轴体及第二轴体,所述第一槽体组包括第一自由段、第二自由段及锁止段,所述第一自由段包括相对设置的初始位置及停止位置,所述第二自由段包括相连的第一段及第二段,所述第二铰链件与所述切换组件之间通过相互配合的第二轴体组及第二槽体组实现相对运动,所述第二轴体组包括第三轴体及第四轴体,所述第二槽体组包括第三自由段、第四自由段及限位段,当所 述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第一轴体位于所述初始位置,所述第二轴体位于所述第一段远离所述第二段的一端,且所述第四轴体位于所述限位段而使得所述切换组件限位所述第二铰链件,所述第一配合部与所述第二配合部相互卡合,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体于所述初始位置原地转动,所述第二轴体以所述第一轴体为圆心而于所述第一段内运动,所述第一配合部脱离所述第二配合部,而后所述第二轴体于所述第二段内运动而带动所述第一轴体由所述初始位置运动至所述停止位置,所述门体由容纳腔室朝向枢转侧移动,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第四轴体脱离所述限位段,且所述第一轴体和/或所述第二轴体限位于所述锁止段而使得所述切换组件限位所述第一铰链件,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体于所述第三自由段内原地转动,所述第四轴体以所述第三轴体为圆心而于所述第四自由段运动。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述门体包括枢轴连接所述箱体且沿水平方向并排设置的第一门体及第二门体,所述冰箱还包括活动连接于所述第一门体靠近所述第二门体一侧的竖梁,所述第一配合部设置于所述竖梁处,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述竖梁延伸至所述第二门体处,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述门体相对所述箱体原地转动而使得所述竖梁朝靠近所述容纳腔室的一侧转动,所述第一门体与所述竖梁之间具有第一折叠角度,而后所述竖梁与所述第一门体保持相对静止。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述箱体包括邻近所述铰链组件且在所述门体转动路径延伸段上的外侧面,所述门体包括远离所述容纳腔室的前壁及始终夹设于所述前壁及所述容纳腔室之间的侧壁,所述前壁与所述侧壁之间具有侧棱,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述侧棱运动至位于所述外侧面靠近所述容纳腔室的一侧。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一铰链件包括所述第一轴体及所述第二轴体,所述切换组件包括具有所述第一自由段的第一槽体、具有所述第二自由段的第二槽体、所述第三轴体及所述第四轴体,所述第二铰链件包括具有所述第三自由段的第三槽体及具有所述第四自由段的第四槽体。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述切换组件包括相互配合的第一切换件及第二切换件,所述第一槽体包括位于所述第一切换件的第一上槽体及位于所述第二切换件的第一下槽体,所述第一自由段包括位于所述第一上槽体的第一上自由段及位于所述第一下槽体的第一下自由段,所述第二槽体包括位于所述第一切换件的第二上槽体及位于所述第二切换件的第二下槽体,所述第二自由段包括位于所述第二上槽体的第二上自由段及位于所述第二下槽体的第二下自由段,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件与所述第二切换件相对静止,所述第一上自由段与所述第一下自由段重合形成所述第一自由段,所述第二上自由段与所述第二下自由段重合形成所述第二自由段,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件相对所述第二切换件运动而使得所述第四轴体脱离所述限位段,且所述第一轴体和/或所述第二轴体限位于所述锁止段,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件与所述第二切换件相对静止。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述锁止段包括连通所述第一上自由段的第一上锁止段、连通所述第一下自由段的第一下锁止段、连通所述第二上自由段的第二上锁止段及连通所述第二下自由段的第二下锁止段,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体同时限位于所述第一上锁止段及所述第一下锁止段,所述第二轴体同时限位于所述第二上锁止段及所述第二下锁止段。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一上锁止段与所述第一下锁止段始终相互错开,所述第二上锁止段与所述第二下锁止段始终相互错开。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一轴体的中心与所述侧棱之间为第一间距,所述第一轴体的中心与所述前壁之间为第二间距,所述第一轴体的中心与所述侧壁之间为第三间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述侧棱之间为第四间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述前壁之间为第五间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述侧壁之间为第六间距,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一间距、所述第二间距及所述第三间距均先保持不变后呈减小趋势,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第四间距、所述第五间距及所述第六间距均保持不变。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一切换件及所述第二切换件通过第五轴体相互配接,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体以所述第五轴体为圆心运动至所述锁止段。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一切换件相较于所述第二切换件靠近所述第一铰链件。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一切换件包括所述第三轴体,所述第二切换件具有通孔,所述 第三轴体通过所述通孔而延伸至所述第三槽体,所述第二切换件包括所述第四轴体,所述第四轴体延伸至所述第四槽体。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述箱体包括开口及环绕所述开口设置的前端面,所述第一轴体与所述前端面之间具有第一距离,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体与所述前端面之间具有第二距离,所述第二距离大于所述第一距离。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述冰箱还包括邻近铰链组件且在门体转动路径延伸段上的外侧面,所述第一轴体与所述外侧面之间具有第三距离,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体与所述外侧面之间具有第四距离,所述第四距离小于所述第三距离。
为实现上述发明目的之一,本发明一实施方式提供一种嵌入式冰箱,包括箱体、用以打开和关闭箱体的门体以及连接箱体及门体的铰链组件,箱体包括容纳腔室及连接铰链组件的枢转侧,所述铰链组件包括固定于所述箱体的第一铰链件、固定于所述门体的第二铰链件以及连接所述第一铰链件及所述第二铰链件的切换组件,所述第一铰链件与所述切换组件之间通过相互配合的第一轴体及第一槽体实现相对运动,所述第一槽体包括第一自由段,所述第二铰链件与所述切换组件之间通过相互配合的第二轴体组及第二槽体组实现相对运动,所述第二轴体组包括第三轴体及第四轴体,所述第二槽体组包括第三自由段、第四自由段及限位段,所述第三自由段包括相对设置的起始位置及枢转位置,所述第四自由段包括依次相连的移动段及转动段,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第一轴体位于所述第一自由段,所述第四轴体位于所述限位段而使得所述切换组件限位所述第二铰链件,所述第三轴体位于所述起始位置,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体于所述第一自由段内原地转动而带动所述门体相对所述箱体原地转动,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第四轴体脱离所述限位段,所述第三轴体保持在所述起始位置,所述切换组件限位所述第一铰链件,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第四轴体于所述移动段内运动而带动所述第三轴体由所述起始位置运动至所述枢转位置,所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动,而后所述第三轴体于所述枢转位置原地转动,所述第四轴体以所述第三轴体为圆心而于所述转动段运动,所述门体相对所述箱体继续原地转动。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一铰链件包括所述第一轴体,所述切换组件包括所述第一槽体、所述第三轴体及所述第四轴体,所述第二铰链件包括具有所述第三自由段的第三槽体及具有所述第四自由段、所述限位段的第四槽体。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述切换组件包括相互配合的第一切换件及第二切换件,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中或是处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件与所述第二切换件相对静止,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件相对所述第二切换件运动而使得所述第四轴体脱离所述限位段。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一铰链件包括第一限位部,所述第一切换件包括第二限位部,所述第一槽体包括位于所述第一切换件的第一上槽体及位于所述第二切换件的第一下槽体,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一上槽体与所述第一下槽体之间的重合部分为第一自由段,所述第一轴体于所述第一自由段内原地转动,所述第二限位部抵接所述第一限位部而使得所述切换组件限位所述第一铰链件,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件相对所述第二切换件运动而使得所述第四轴体脱离所述限位段。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一限位部及所述第二限位部的其中之一为凸块,其中另一为凹陷部,所述凸块包括第一限位面,所述凹陷部包括第二限位面,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第一限位面远离所述第二限位面,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一限位面与所述第二限位面逐渐靠近直至所述第一限位面抵接所述第二限位面。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述凹陷部位于所述第一切换件,所述凸块位于所述第一铰链件。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一上槽体的开口尺寸与所述第一轴体相互匹配,所述第一下槽体的开口尺寸大于所述第一上槽体的开口尺寸。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一切换件包括第一止挡部,所述第二切换件包括与所述第一止挡部配合的第二止挡部,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度闭合至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第二切换件通过所述第二止挡部与所述第一止挡部的配合限制所述第一切换件的运动。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一切换件及所述第二切换件通过第五轴体相互配接。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一切换件相较于所述第二切换件靠近所述第一铰链件。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一切换件包括所述第三轴体,所述第二切换件具有通孔,所述第三轴体通过所述通孔而延伸至所述第三槽体,所述第二切换件包括所述第四轴体,所述第四轴体延伸至所述第四槽体。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述箱体包括开口及环绕所述开口设置的前端面,所述第一轴体与所述前端面之间具有第一距离,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体与所述前端面之间具有第二距离,所述第二距离大于所述第一距离。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述冰箱还包括邻近铰链组件且在门体转动路径延伸段上的外侧面,所述第一轴体与所述外侧面之间具有第三距离,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体与所述外侧面之间具有第四距离,所述第四距离小于所述第三距离。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述门体包括远离容纳腔室的前壁及始终夹设于所述前壁及所述容纳腔室之间的侧壁,所述前壁与所述侧壁之间具有侧棱,所述第三轴体的中心与所述侧棱之间为第四间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述前壁之间为第五间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述侧壁之间为第六间距,当门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,第四间距、第五间距及第六间距均先呈减小趋势后保持不变。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述门体上设有第一配合部,所述箱体上设有第二配合部,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第一配合部与所述第二配合部相互卡合,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述铰链组件驱动所述门体相对所述箱体原地转动而带动所述第一配合部脱离所述第二配合部。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述门体包括枢轴连接所述箱体且沿水平方向并排设置的第一门体及第二门体,所述冰箱还包括活动连接于所述第一门体靠近所述第二门体一侧的竖梁,所述第一配合部设置于所述竖梁处,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述竖梁延伸至所述第二门体处,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述门体相对所述箱体原地转动而使得所述竖梁朝靠近所述容纳腔室的一侧转动,所述第一门体与所述竖梁之间具有第一折叠角度,而后所述竖梁与所述第一门体保持相对静止。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一配合部为向上凸伸出所述竖梁的凸块,所述第二配合部为具有缺口的凹槽,所述凸块通过所述缺口进入或脱离所述凹槽。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述箱体还包括将所述容纳腔室分隔为第一间室及第二间室的固定梁,所述门体包括对应所述第一间室设置的第一门体及对应所述第二间室设置的第二门体,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第一门体及所述第二门体均与所述固定梁接触,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述铰链组件驱动所述门体相对所述箱体原地转动而带动所述门体脱离所述固定梁。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述起始位置与所述枢转位置之间的连线平行于所述移动段。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第三自由段呈椭圆形,所述移动段呈弧形。
为实现上述发明目的之一,本发明一实施方式提供一种嵌入式冰箱,其特征在于,包括箱体、用以打开和关闭所述箱体的门体以及连接所述箱体及所述门体的铰链组件,所述箱体包括容纳腔室及连接所述铰链组件的枢转侧,所述铰链组件包括固定于所述箱体的第一铰链件、固定于所述门体的第二铰链件以及连接所述第一铰链件及所述第二铰链件的切换组件,所述切换组件包括相互配合的第一切换件及第二切换件,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件、所述第二切换件及所述第二铰链件相对静止并一起相对所述第一铰链件运动,所述门体相对所述箱体原地转动,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件与所述第一铰链件相对静止,所述第二切换件与所述第二铰链件相对静止并一起相对所述第一切换件运动,所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第一铰链件、所述第一切换件及所述第二切换件相对静止,所述第二铰链件相对所述第二切换件运动,所述门体相对所述箱体继续原地转动。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一铰链件包括第一轴体,所述第一切换件包括第三轴体及第一上槽体,所述第二切换件包括第四轴体及通孔,所述第二铰链件包括第三槽体及第四槽体,所述通孔包括相对设置的初始位置及停止位置,所述第三槽体包括相对设置的起始位置及枢转位置,所述第四槽体包括相对设置的转动起始位置及转动停止位置,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第一轴体延伸至所述第一上槽体,所述第三轴体依次穿过所述通孔及所述第三槽体,且所述第三轴体位于所述初始位置及所述起始位置,所述第四轴体位于所述第四槽体的所述转动起始位置,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体于所述第一上槽体内原地转动而带动所述门体相对所述箱体原地转动,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第四轴体保持在所述转动起始位置,所述第三轴体由所述初始位置运动至所述停止位置,同时所述第三轴体由所述起始位置运动至所述枢转位置,所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动,当所述门 体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体保持在所述停止位置及所述枢转位置,所述第四轴体由所述转动起始位置运动至所述转动停止位置,所述门体相对所述箱体继续原地转动。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一上槽体呈圆形,所述通孔及所述第三槽体均呈椭圆形。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第四槽体为圆弧槽,且所述圆弧槽的圆心为所述第三槽体的所述枢转位置。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一铰链件包括第一限位部,所述第一切换件包括第二限位部,所述第一限位部及所述第二限位部的其中之一为凸块,其中另一为凹陷部,所述凸块包括第一限位面,所述凹陷部包括第二限位面,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第一限位面远离所述第二限位面,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一限位面与所述第二限位面逐渐靠近直至所述第一限位面抵接所述第二限位面。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一铰链件包括第一卡合部及第二卡合部,所述第一切换件包括第三卡合部,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第三卡合部限位于所述第一卡合部,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第三卡合部脱离所述第一卡合部,且所述第三卡合部与所述第二卡合部逐渐靠近直至所述第三卡合部限位于所述第二卡合部。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一卡合部及所述第二卡合部均为凹口,所述第三卡合部包括第三弹性件及第三凸台,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第三弹性件作用所述第三凸台限位于所述第一卡合部,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一铰链件的底面抵接所述第三凸台而驱动所述第三弹性件压缩,且当所述第三凸台接触所述第二卡合部时,所述第三弹性件复位而带动所述第三凸台进入所述第二卡合部。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一切换件包括第四卡合部及第五卡合部,所述第二切换件包括第六卡合部,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第六卡合部限位于所述第四卡合部,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第六卡合部脱离所述第四卡合部,且所述第六卡合部与所述第五卡合部逐渐靠近直至所述第六卡合部限位于所述第五卡合部。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第四卡合部及所述第五卡合部均为凹口,所述第六卡合部包括第六弹性件及第六凸台,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第六弹性件作用所述第六凸台限位于所述第四卡合部,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第二切换件相对所述第一切换件运动而带动所述第六卡合部脱离所述第四卡合部,所述第一切换件靠近所述第二切换件的底面抵接所述第六凸台而驱动所述第六弹性件压缩,且当所述第六凸台接触所述第五卡合部时,所述第六弹性件复位而带动所述第六凸台进入所述第五卡合部。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第二切换件包括第一下槽体,所述第一轴体依次穿过所述第一上槽体及所述第一下槽体,所述第一下槽体包括相对设置的第一端及第二端,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体保持在所述第一端,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体由所述第一端运动至所述第二端。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一下槽体平行于所述通孔,且所述第一下槽体及所述通孔均呈椭圆形。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一切换件与所述第二切换件之间通过第五轴体及第五槽体配合,所述第五槽体包括相对设置的第三端及第四端,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第五轴体保持在所述第三端,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第五轴体由所述第三端运动至所述第四端。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第五槽体平行于所述通孔,且所述第五槽体及所述通孔均呈椭圆形。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第一切换件相较于所述第二切换件靠近所述第一铰链件。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述箱体包括开口及环绕所述开口设置的前端面,所述第一轴体与所述前端面之间具有第一距离,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体与所述前端面之间具有第二距离,所述第二距离大于所述第一距离。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述箱体还包括邻近铰链组件且在门体转动路径延伸段上的外侧面,所述第一轴体与所述外侧面之间具有第三距离,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体与所述外侧面之间具有第四距离,所述第四距离小于所述第三距离。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述门体包括远离容纳腔室的前壁及始终夹设于所述前壁及所述容纳腔室之间的侧壁,所述前壁与所述侧壁之间具有侧棱,所述第三轴体的中心与所述侧棱之间为第四间距,所述第三轴体的中心与所述侧壁之间为第六间距,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第四间距及所述第六间距均呈减小趋势。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述第三轴体的中心与所述前壁之间为第五间距,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第五间距呈增大趋势。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述箱体还包括邻近铰链组件且在门体转动路径延伸段上的外侧面,当所述门体处于第一开启角度时,所述初始位置相较于所述停止位置远离所述外侧面。
作为本发明一实施方式的进一步改进,所述箱体包括开口及环绕所述开口设置的前端面,当所述门体处于第一开启角度时,所述初始位置相较于所述停止位置远离所述前端面。
为实现上述发明目的之一,本发明一实施方式提供一种嵌入式冰箱,包括箱体、用以打开和关闭所述箱体的门体以及连接所述箱体及所述门体的铰链组件,所述箱体包括容纳腔室及连接所述铰链组件的枢转侧,所述铰链组件包括固定于所述箱体的第一铰链件、固定于所述门体的第二铰链件以及连接所述第一铰链件及所述第二铰链件的切换组件,所述切换组件包括相互配合的第一切换件及第二切换件,所述第一铰链件包括第一轴体,所述第一切换件包括第三轴体及第一上槽体,所述第二切换件包括第四轴体及通孔,所述第二铰链件包括第三槽体及第四槽体,所述通孔包括相对设置的初始位置及停止位置,所述第三槽体包括相对设置的起始位置及枢转位置,所述第四槽体包括相对设置的转动起始位置及转动停止位置,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第一轴体延伸至所述第一上槽体,所述第三轴体依次穿过所述通孔及所述第三槽体,且所述第三轴体位于所述初始位置及所述起始位置,所述第四轴体位于所述第四槽体的所述转动起始位置,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体于所述第一上槽体内原地转动而带动所述门体相对所述箱体原地转动,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第四轴体保持在所述转动起始位置,所述第三轴体由所述初始位置运动至所述停止位置,同时所述第三轴体由所述起始位置运动至所述枢转位置,所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体保持在所述停止位置及所述枢转位置,所述第四轴体由所述转动起始位置运动至所述转动停止位置,所述门体相对所述箱体继续原地转动。
与现有技术相比,本发明的有益效果在于:本发明一实施方式的冰箱可提高门体开闭的自由度,且可产生多种运动轨迹以适应不同的应用场景。
附图说明
图1是本发明第一实施方式的多门冰箱立体图;
图2是本发明第一实施方式的多门冰箱处于关闭状态的示意图;
图3是本发明第一实施方式的多门冰箱开启至第一中间开启角度的示意图;
图4是本发明第一实施方式的多门冰箱后视图(省略部分元件);
图5是本发明第一实施方式的第一配合部、第二配合部爆炸图;
图6是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于关闭状态的第一视角立体图;
图7至图9是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件第一视角不同状态爆炸图;
图10是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于关闭状态的第二视角立体图;
图11至图13是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件第二视角不同状态爆炸图;
图14是本发明第一实施方式的冰箱处于闭合状态的俯视图;
图15是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于闭合状态的立体图;
图16是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于闭合状态的俯视剖视图;
图17是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于闭合状态的仰视剖视图;
图18是本发明第一实施方式的冰箱处于第一中间开启角度的俯视图;
图19是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于第一中间开启角度的立体图;
图20是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于第一中间开启角度的俯视剖视图;
图21是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于第一中间开启角度的仰视剖视图;
图22是本发明第一实施方式的冰箱处于第一开启角度的俯视图;
图23是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于第一开启角度的立体图;
图24是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于第一开启角度的俯视剖视图;
图25是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于第一开启角度的仰视剖视图;
图26是本发明第一实施方式的冰箱处于第二开启角度的俯视图;
图27是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于第二开启角度的立体图;
图28是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于第二开启角度的俯视剖视图;
图29是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于第二开启角度的仰视剖视图;
图30是本发明第一实施方式的冰箱处于最大开启角度的俯视图;
图31是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于最大开启角度的立体图;
图32是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于最大开启角度的俯视剖视图;
图33是本发明第一实施方式的铰链组件处于最大开启角度的仰视剖视图;
图34是本发明第一实施方式的冰箱全嵌入状态的示意图;
图35是本发明第一实施方式的门体下方的铰链组件立体图;
图36是本发明第一实施方式的门体下方的铰链组件爆炸图;
图37是本发明第二实施方式的对开门冰箱立体图;
图38是本发明第二实施方式的对开门冰箱省略第二门体的示意图;
图39是本发明第二实施方式的对开门冰箱省略门体的示意图;
图40是本发明第二实施方式的铰链组件处于关闭状态立体图;
图41至图43是本发明第二实施方式的铰链组件不同状态爆炸图;
图44是本发明第三实施方式的铰链组件处于关闭状态的立体图;
图45至图48是本发明第三实施方式的铰链组件不同状态爆炸图;
图49是本发明第三实施方式的冰箱处于闭合状态的俯视图;
图50是本发明第三实施方式的铰链组件处于闭合状态的立体图;
图51是本发明第三实施方式的铰链组件处于闭合状态的俯视剖视图;
图52是本发明第三实施方式的铰链组件处于闭合状态的仰视剖视图;
图53是本发明第三实施方式的冰箱处于第一开启角度的俯视图;
图54是本发明第三实施方式的铰链组件处于第一开启角度的立体图;
图55是本发明第三实施方式的铰链组件处于第一开启角度的俯视剖视图;
图56是本发明第三实施方式的铰链组件处于第一开启角度的仰视剖视图;
图57是本发明第三实施方式的冰箱处于第二开启角度的俯视图;
图58是本发明第三实施方式的铰链组件处于第二开启角度的立体图;
图59是本发明第三实施方式的铰链组件处于第二开启角度的俯视剖视图;
图60是本发明第三实施方式的铰链组件处于第二开启角度的仰视剖视图;
图61是本发明第三实施方式的冰箱处于第一中间开启角度的俯视图;
图62是本发明第三实施方式的铰链组件处于第一中间开启角度的立体图;
图63是本发明第三实施方式的铰链组件处于第一中间开启角度的俯视剖视图;
图64是本发明第三实施方式的铰链组件处于第一中间开启角度的仰视剖视图;
图65是本发明第三实施方式的冰箱处于最大开启角度的俯视图;
图66是本发明第三实施方式的铰链组件处于最大开启角度的立体图;
图67是本发明第三实施方式的铰链组件处于最大开启角度的俯视剖视图;
图68是本发明第三实施方式的铰链组件处于最大开启角度的仰视剖视图;
图69是本发明另一实施方式的铰链组件爆炸图;
图70至图73是本发明另一实施方式的铰链组件处于不同开启角度的仰视剖视图;
图74是本发明第四实施方式的铰链组件处于闭合状态的示意图;
图75及图76是本发明第四实施方式的铰链组件不同角度爆炸图;
图77是本发明第四实施方式的冰箱处于闭合状态的俯视图;
图78是本发明第四实施方式的铰链组件处于闭合状态的立体图;
图79是图78中F1-F1的剖视图;
图80是图78中F2-F2的剖视图;
图81是本发明第四实施方式的铰链组件的仰视图;
图82是本发明第四实施方式的冰箱处于第一开启角度的俯视图;
图83是本发明第四实施方式的铰链组件处于第一开启角度的立体图;
图84是图83中F1-F1的剖视图;
图85是图83中F2-F2的剖视图;
图86是本发明第四实施方式的铰链组件处于第一开启角度的仰视图;
图87是本发明第四实施方式的冰箱处于第二开启角度的俯视图;
图88是本发明第四实施方式的铰链组件处于第二开启角度的立体图;
图89是图88中F1-F1的剖视图;
图90是图88中F2-F2的剖视图;
图91是本发明第四实施方式的铰链组件处于第二开启角度的仰视图;
图92是本发明第四实施方式的冰箱处于最大开启角度的俯视图;
图93是本发明第四实施方式的铰链组件处于最大开启角度的立体图;
图94是图93中F1-F1的剖视图;
图95是图93中F2-F2的剖视图;
图96是本发明第四实施方式的铰链组件处于最大开启角度的仰视图;
图97是本发明一实施方式的带有走线模块的冰箱立体图;
图98是本发明一实施方式的带有走线模块的冰箱俯视图;
图99是本发明一实施方式的带有走线模块的冰箱立体状态下局部放大图;
图100是本发明一实施方式的带有走线模块的冰箱俯视状态下局部放大图(对应门体闭合状态);
图101是本发明一实施方式的带有走线模块的冰箱俯视状态下局部放大图(对应门体开启状态)。
具体实施方式
以下将结合附图所示的具体实施方式对本发明进行详细描述。但这些实施方式并不限制本发明,本领域的普通技术人员根据这些实施方式所做出的结构、方法、或功能上的变换均包含在本发明的保护范围内。
在本发明的各个图示中,为了便于图示,结构或部分的某些尺寸会相对于其它结构或部分夸大,因此,仅用于图示本发明的主题的基本结构。
另外,本文使用的例如“上”、“上方”、“下”、“下方”、“左”、“右”等表示空间相对位置的术语是出于便于说明的目的来描述如附图中所示的一个单元或特征相对于另一个单元或特征的关系。空间相对位置的术语可以旨在包括设备在使用或工作中除了图中所示方位以外的不同方位。例如,如果将图中的设备翻转,则被描述为位于其他单元或特征“下方”或“之下”的单元将位于其他单元或特征“上方”。因此,示例性术语“下方”可以囊括上方和下方这两种方位。设备可以以其他方式被定向(旋转90度或其他朝向),并相应地解释本文使用的与空间相关的描述语。
在本实施方式中,结合图1至图13,冰箱100包括箱体10、用以打开和关闭箱体10的门体20以及连接箱体10及门体20的铰链组件30。
箱体10包括容纳腔室S及连接铰链组件30的枢转侧P。
铰链组件30包括第一铰链件31、第二铰链件32以及连接第一铰链件31及第二铰链件32的切换组件40。
当门体20处于开启过程中时,第一铰链件31先相对切换组件40运动,而后第二铰链件32相对切换组件40运动,其中,铰链组件30先驱动门体20相对箱体10原地转动,再驱动门体20由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动,而后再驱动门体20相对箱体10继续原地转动。
这里,通过门体20相对箱体10原地转动可有效避免因门体20某个方向的位移而导致门体20无法正常开启,通过门体20由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动可避免门体20在打开过程中与周边的橱柜或墙体等产生干涉,适用于嵌入式橱柜或容纳冰箱100的空间较小的场景。
另外,本实施方式通过切换组件33可实现第一铰链件31与第二铰链件32之间的切换工作,第一铰链件31及第二铰链件32分别可实现原地转动、由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动及继续原地转动中的部分功能,且在本实施方式中,原地转动、由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动及继续原地转动是依序逐个完成的。
在本实施方式中,第一铰链件31固定于箱体10,第二铰链件32固定于门体20,切换组件40包括第一配合件41及第二配合件42,第一铰链件31与第二铰链件32有多种组合方式。
在第一种组合方式中,当门体20处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,第一铰链件31与第一配合件41相对运动而驱动门体20相对箱体10原地转动,而后第一铰链件31与第一配合件41相对运动而驱动门 体20由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动,且第二配合件42限位第二铰链件32,当门体20处于由第一开启角度α1继续开启至第二开启角度α2的过程中时,第二铰链件32脱离第二配合件42的限位,且第一配合件41限位第一铰链件31,当门体20处于由第二开启角度α2继续开启至最大开启角度α3的过程中时,第二铰链件32与第二配合件42相对运动而驱动门体20继续原地转动。
也就是说,本示例的第一铰链件31与第一配合件41配合而依次实现门体20原地转动及门体20由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动,第二铰链件32与第二配合件42配合而实现门体20继续原地转动,其中,切换组件40通过锁止解锁功能可实现第一铰链件31先工作,第二铰链件32后工作。
在第二种组合方式中,当门体20处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,第一铰链件31与第一配合件41相对运动而驱动门体20相对箱体10原地转动,且第二配合件42限位第二铰链件32,当门体20处于由第一开启角度α1继续开启至第二开启角度α2的过程中时,第二铰链件32脱离第二配合件42的限位,且第一配合件41限位第一铰链件31,当门体20处于由第二开启角度α2继续开启至最大开启角度α3的过程中时,第二铰链件32与第二配合件42相对运动而驱动门体20由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动,而后第二铰链件32与第二配合件42相对运动而驱动门体20继续原地转动。
也就是说,本示例的第一铰链件31与第一配合件41配合而实现门体20原地转动,第二铰链件32与第二配合件42配合而依次实现门体20由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动及门体20继续原地转动,其中,切换组件40通过锁止解锁功能可实现第一铰链件31先工作,第二铰链件32后工作。
下面,以这两种组合方式的多种具体实施方式为例具体说明本实施方式的冰箱100,且冰箱100以多门冰箱100为例。
结合图1至图5,为本发明第一实施方式的多门冰箱100示意图。
冰箱100包括箱体10、用以打开和关闭箱体10的门体20以及连接箱体10及门体20的铰链组件30。
需要强调的是,本实施方式的结构不仅适用于带有铰链组件30的多门冰箱100,也可适用于其他场景,例如橱柜、酒柜、衣柜等等,本发明以多门冰箱100为例作说明,但不以此为限。
箱体10包括容纳腔室S及连接铰链组件30的枢转侧P。
这里,“枢转侧P”定义为门体20相对箱体10转动的区域,即设置有铰链组件30的区域,枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S的方向定义为第一方向X,容纳腔室S朝向枢转侧P的方向定义为第二方向Y。
具体的,当冰箱100左右两侧均设有铰链组件30时,箱体10包括左侧枢转侧P1及右侧枢转侧P2,当枢转侧P为左侧枢转侧P1时,第一方向X为从左至右的方向,第二方向Y为从右至左的方向,当枢转侧P为右侧枢转侧P2时,第一方向X为从右至左的方向,第二方向Y为从左至右的方向,也就是说,对应不同的枢转侧P,第一方向X与第二方向Y的实际方向是不同的,后续说明以枢转侧P为左侧枢转侧P1为例。
门体20上设有第一配合部25,箱体10上设有第二配合部12。
结合图6至图13,铰链组件30包括固定于箱体10的第一铰链件31、固定于门体20的第二铰链件32以及连接第一铰链件31及第二铰链件32的切换组件40。
第一铰链件31与切换组件40之间通过相互配合的第一轴体组311、312及第一槽体组411、412实现相对运动,第一轴体组311、312包括第一轴体311及第二轴体312,第一槽体组411、412包括第一自由段S1、第二自由段S2及锁止段4132、4142、4152、4162,第一自由段S1包括相对设置的初始位置A1及停止位置A2,第二自由段S2包括相连的第一段L1及第二段L2。
第二铰链件32与切换组件40之间通过相互配合的第二轴体组321、322及第二槽体组421、422实现相对运动,第二轴体组321、322包括第三轴体321及第四轴体322,第二槽体组421、422包括第三自由段421、第四自由段4221及限位段4222。
当门体20处于关闭状态时(可参考图14至图17),第一轴体311位于初始位置A1,第二轴体312位于第一段L1远离第二段L2的一端,且第四轴体322位于限位段4222而使得切换组件40限位第二铰链件32,第一配合部25与第二配合部12相互卡合。
这里,第一配合部25与第二配合部12相互卡合可实现门体20与箱体10的闭合,第一配合部25与第二配合部12的具体形式可以根据实际情况而定。
当门体20处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时(可参考图18至图25),第一轴体311于初始位置A1原地转动,第二轴体312以第一轴体311为圆心而于第一段L1内运动,第一配合部25脱离第二配合部12,门体20相对箱体10原地转动,而后第二轴体312于第二段L2内运动而带动第一轴体311由初始位置A1运动至停止位置A2,门体20由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动。
具体的,当门体20处于由关闭状态开启至第一中间开启角度α11的过程中时(可参考图18至图21),第一轴体311于初始位置A1原地转动,第二轴体312以第一轴体311为圆心而于第一段L1内运动,门体20相对箱体10原地转动,第一配合部25脱离第二配合部12。
这里,当门体20处于由关闭状态开启至第一中间开启角度α11的过程中时,门体20相对箱体10原地转动,即门体20仅转动而不产生其他方向的位移,可以有效避免因门体20某个方向的位移而导致第一配合部25无法脱离第二配合部12的现象。
需要说明的是,冰箱100可以是具有第一配合部25及第二配合部12的单门冰箱,或者是具有第一配合部25及第二配合部12的对开门冰箱、多门冰箱等等,在本实施方式中,冰箱100为五门冰箱。
当门体20处于由第一中间开启角度α11开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时(可参考图22至图25),第二轴体312于第二段L2内运动而带动第一轴体311由初始位置A1运动至停止位置A2,门体20由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动。
这里,当门体20处于由第一中间开启角度α11继续开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,门体20朝向容纳腔室S的一侧移动,即此时门体20既相对箱体10发生转动又相对箱体10沿第一方向X产生了位移,如此,门体20在转动过程中朝远离容纳腔室S的一侧凸伸出箱体10的距离会大大减小,即门体20沿第一方向X产生的位移抵消了门体20转动过程中沿第二方向Y凸伸出箱体10的部分,从而避免门体20在打开过程中与周边的橱柜或墙体等产生干涉,适用于嵌入式橱柜或容纳冰箱100的空间较小的场景。
当门体20处于由第一开启角度α1继续开启至第二开启角度α2的过程中时(可参考图26至图29),第四轴体322脱离限位段4222,且第一轴体311和/或第二轴体312限位于锁止段4132、4142、4152、4162而使得切换组件40限位第一铰链件31。
当门体20处于由第二开启角度α2继续开启至最大开启角度α3的过程中时(可参考图30至图33),第三轴体321于第三自由段421内原地转动,第四轴体322以第三轴体321为圆心而于第四自由段4221运动,门体20相对箱体10继续原地转动。
在本实施方式中,门体20包括枢轴连接箱体10且沿水平方向并排设置的第一门体206及第二门体207。
冰箱100还包括活动连接于第一门体206靠近第二门体207一侧的竖梁80,第一配合部25设置于竖梁80处。
这里,竖梁80活动连接于第一门体206的右侧,竖梁80与第一门体206之间可通过复位弹簧81连接,竖梁80以竖直方向的轴线为中心相对第一门体206转动,换句话说,竖梁80可通过复位弹簧81作用而相对第一门体206转动并保持在一预定位置。
第一配合部25为向上凸伸出竖梁80的凸块25。
第二配合部12固设于箱体10上,例如,第二配合部12为基座104上的凹槽12,基座104固设于容纳腔室S顶部,凹槽12的一端具有缺口121,缺口121的开口方向朝前,凸块25及凹槽12均呈弧状,凸块25通过缺口121进入或脱离凹槽12以实现凸块25与凹槽12的相互限位及相互分离。
当然,可以理解的,第一配合部25、第二配合部12的具体结构不以上述说明为限,即第一配合部25不限定为竖梁80处的凸块25,第二配合部12不限定为与凸块25配合的凹槽12,第一配合部25及第二配合部12可以是冰箱100其他区域相互配合的结构。
在本实施方式中,门体20还包括枢轴连接箱体10且沿水平方向并排设置的第三门体208及第四门体209,第三门体208位于第一门体206的下方,且第四门体209位于第二门体207的下方,冰箱100还包括位于第三门体208及第四门体209下方的抽屉300。
这里,第一门体206及第二门体207对应的容纳腔室S为冷藏室,即冷藏室为对开门结构;第三门体208及第四门体209分别对应独立的两个变温间室;抽屉300为冷冻抽屉。
需要说明的是,冰箱100包括固定于箱体10内部且用于分隔两个变温间室的固定梁,第三门体208及第四门体209可与固定梁配合而实现密封,也就是说,此时第三门体208及第四门体209处无需再设置竖梁。
继续结合图1至图13,第一铰链件31包括第一轴体311及第二轴体322,切换组件40包括具有第一自由段S1的第一槽体411、具有第二自由段S2的第二槽体412、第三轴体321及第四轴体322,第二铰链件32包括具有第三自由段421的第三槽体421及具有第四自由段4221的第四槽体422。
在本实施方式中,第一配合件41及第二配合件42具体为相互配合的第一切换件401及第二切换件402,即切换组件40包括相互配合的第一切换件401及第二切换件402,但不以此为限。
第一槽体411包括位于第一切换件401的第一上槽体413及位于第二切换件402的第一下槽体414,第一自由段S1包括位于第一上槽体413的第一上自由段4131及位于第一下槽体414的第一下自由段4141。
第二槽体412包括位于第一切换件401的第二上槽体415及位于第二切换件402的第二下槽体416,第二自由段S2包括位于第二上槽体415的第二上自由段4151及位于第二下槽体416的第二下自由段4161。
锁止段4132、4142、4152、4162包括连通第一上自由段4131的第一上锁止段4132、连通第一下自由段4141的第一下锁止段4142、连通第二上自由段4151的第二上锁止段4152及连通第二下自由段4161的第二下锁止段4162。
需要说明的是,第一上锁止段4132可以是第一上自由段4131的延伸段,比如第一上锁止段4132靠近停止位置A2,也可以是与第一上自由段4131之间具有一定的夹角,当然,也可以不包括第一上锁止段4132及第二上锁止段4152,而是通过第一下锁止段4142与第二下锁止段4162实现锁止。
第一上锁止段4132与第一下锁止段4142始终相互错开,第二上锁止段4152与第二下锁止段4162始终相互错开。
这里,“始终相互错开”是指在门体20开启过程中,第一上锁止段4132与第一下锁止段4142不会出现完全重合的状态,第二上锁止段4152与第二下锁止段4162也不会出现完全重合的状态。
在本实施方式中,第一切换件401相较于第二切换件402靠近第一铰链件31,即第一铰链件31、第一切换件401、第二切换件402及第二铰链件32之间依次叠置。
结合图9及图13,铰链组件30还包括第一铆接片4111及第二铆接片4121,当第一轴体311延伸至第一槽体411中时,第一铆接片4111位于第二切换件402的下方并套接第一轴体311,如此可避免第一轴体311脱离第一槽体411,同样的,当第二轴体312延伸至第二槽体412中时,第二铆接片4121位于第二切换件402的下方并套接第二轴体312,如此可避免第二轴体312脱离第二槽体412。
第一切换件401及第二切换件402通过第五轴体50相互配接。
这里,第一切换件401及第二切换件402上设置有第一贯穿孔4014及第二贯穿孔4024,独立的铆接件作为第五轴体50穿过第一贯穿孔4014及第二贯穿孔4024。
具体的,第五轴体50包括铆接柱51及铆接柱垫片52,铆接柱51具有较大尺寸的一端位于第二贯穿孔4024的下方,铆接柱51具有较小尺寸的一端依次延伸至第二贯穿孔4024及第一贯穿孔4014中,而铆接柱垫片52位于第一贯穿孔4014上方并与铆接柱51配合而锁止铆接柱51。
如此,可实现第一切换件401及第二切换件402的相互配接,即可实现第一切换件401及第二切换件402的相对运动,且第一切换件401及第二切换件402不会相互分离。
需要说明的是,第一贯穿孔4014及第二贯穿孔4024与第五轴体50相互匹配,第一切换件401相对第二切换件402原地转动。
在其他实施方式中,可以在第一切换件401及第二切换件402的其中之一上设置贯穿孔,其中另一上设置第五轴体50,通过第五轴体50与贯穿孔的配合实现第一切换件401与第二切换件402的相互配接,但不以此为限。
另外,第一切换件401包括第三轴体321,第二切换件402具有通孔4026,第三轴体321通过通孔4026而延伸至第三槽体421,第二切换件402包括第四轴体322,第四轴体322延伸至第四槽体422。
这里,通孔4026的尺寸可大于第三轴体321的尺寸,如此,可使得第三轴体321于通孔4026内活动,当第一切换件401与第二切换件402相对运动时,可避免通孔4026与第三轴体321相互干涉。
也就是说,本实施方式的第三轴体321及第四轴体322位于不同的切换件,但不以此为限。
在本实施方式中,结合图9及图13,第一切换件401包括依次叠置的第一衬片4011、第一滑片4012及第一衬套4013,第二切换片402包括依次叠置的第二衬片4021、第二滑片4022及第二衬套4023。
这里,第一铰链件31、第一衬片4011、第一滑片4012、第一衬套4013、第二衬片4021、第二滑片4022、第二衬套4023及第二铰链件32由上到下依次叠置。
第一衬片4011、第一衬套4013、第二衬片4021及第二衬套4023为塑料材质,例如为聚甲醛(polyformldehyde,POM)等。
第一滑片4012及第二滑片4022为金属材质,例如为不锈钢或Q235钢等。
第一衬片4011、第一滑片4012及第一衬套4013的外轮廓相互匹配,第一衬片4011与第一衬套4013相互配合而将第一滑片4012夹设于两者之间,且第一衬片4011、第一滑片4012及第一衬套4013上均需要设置槽孔以配合形成第一上槽体413、第二上槽体415及第一贯穿孔4014。
这里,可仅在第一滑片4012及第一衬套4013上形成槽孔而形成第一贯穿孔4014,即第一贯穿孔4014未贯穿第一衬片4011,此时,第五轴体50从第一切换件401的下方延伸至第一贯穿孔4011中,而第一衬片4011可遮蔽第一贯穿孔4014及第五轴体50,提高美观度。
第二衬片4021、第二滑片4022及第二衬套4023的外轮廓相互匹配,第二衬片4021与第二衬套4023相互配合而将第二滑片4022夹设于两者之间,且第二衬片4021、第二滑片4022及第二衬套4023上均需要设置槽孔以配合形成第一下槽体414、第二下槽体416及第二贯穿孔4024。
这里,可仅在第二衬片4021及第二滑片4022上形成槽孔而形成第二贯穿孔4024,即第二贯穿孔4024未贯穿第二衬套4023,此时,第五轴体50从第二衬套4023的下方延伸至第二贯穿孔4024及第一贯穿孔4011中,而第二衬套4023可遮蔽第二贯穿孔4024及第五轴体50,提高美观度。
此时,第五轴体50的铆接柱51的一端可限位于第二衬套4023中,进一步提高第二衬片4021、第二滑片4022及第二衬套4023的配合效果。
在本实施方式中,第一切换件401还包括包覆第一衬片4011、第一滑片4012及第一衬套4013周缘的第一装饰片4015,第二切换件402还包括包覆第二衬片4021、第二滑片4022及第二衬套4023周缘的第二装饰片4025,第一装饰片4015与第二装饰片4025相互分离。
这里,“第一装饰片4015与第二装饰片4025相互分离””是指第一装饰片4015与第二装饰片4025为相互独立的结构,当第一切换件401与第二切换件402相对运动时,第一装饰片4015与第二装饰片4025也会产生相对运动。
另外,本实施方式的第一装饰片4015呈“门”字型,即第一装饰片4015仅包覆第一切换件401的三个侧面,便于第一装饰片4015的组装,且可在这三个侧面处设置卡扣结构而实现与第一装饰片4015的配合,于第一切换件401与第二切换件402的叠加方向上,第一装饰片4015的宽度大致等于第一衬片4011、第一滑片4012及第一衬套4013的厚度之和。
同样的,第二装饰片4025呈“门”字型,即第二装饰片4025仅包覆第二切换件402的三个侧面,便于第二装饰片4025的组装,且可在这三个侧面处设置卡扣结构而实现与第二装饰片4025的配合,于第一切换件401与第二切换件402的叠加方向上,第二装饰片4025的宽度大致等于第二衬片4021、第二滑片4022及第二衬套4023的厚度之和。
第一装饰片4015及第二装饰片4025可由ABS(AcrylonitrileButdieneStyrene)塑料制成。
下面,介绍铰链组件30的具体工作流程。
在本实施方式中,箱体10包括邻近铰链组件30且在门体20转动路径延伸段上的外侧面13,门体20包括远离容纳腔室S的前壁21及始终夹设于前壁21及容纳腔室S之间的侧壁22,前壁21与侧壁22之间具有侧棱23。
结合图14至图17,当门体20处于关闭状态时,第一切换件401与第二切换件402相对静止,第一上自由段4131与第一下自由段4141重合形成第一自由段S1,第二上自由段4151与第二下自由段4161重合形成第二自由段S2,第一轴体311位于初始位置A1,第二轴体312位于第一段L1远离第二段L2的一端,凸块25限位于凹槽12中。
具体的,凸块25限位于凹槽12中而使得竖梁80延伸至第二门体207处,即此时竖梁80将贴附在第一门体206、第二门体207的内侧表面,以防止容纳腔室S内的冷气泄漏至对冰箱100的外部。
另外,外侧面13与侧壁22位于同一平面,可以保证外观上的流畅性,提高美观度,且也便于门体20的安装,但不以此为限。
结合图18至图21,当门体20处于由关闭状态开启至第一中间开启角度α11的过程中时,第一切换件401与第二切换件402相对静止,第一上自由段4131与第一下自由段4141重合形成第一自由段S1,第二上自由段4151与第二下自由段4161重合形成第二自由段S2,第一轴体311于初始位置A1原地转动,第二轴体312以第一轴体311为圆心而于第一段L1内运动,门体20相对箱体10原地转动而使得凸块25脱离凹槽12。
具体的,凸块25通过缺口121逐渐脱离凹槽12,同时,竖梁80朝靠近容纳腔室S的一侧转动而使得第一门体206与竖梁80之间具有第一折叠角度β。
这里,当凸块25完全脱离凹槽12时,第一折叠角度β较佳保持在小于90度,避免竖梁80影响第二门体207的开启和关闭。
需要说明的是,由于凸块25及凹槽12之间为弧形配合,当门体20处于关闭状态时,于第一方向X或第二方向Y上,凸块25及凹槽12是相互限位的,若此时在门体20开启至第一中间开启角度α11的过程中门体20沿第一方向X或第二方向Y发生位移,那么凸块25与凹槽11之间会相互干涉卡死而导致凸块25无法脱离凹槽12,从而导致门体20无法开启。
本实施方式在门体20开启至第一中间开启角度α11的过程中门体20相对箱体10原地转动,保证在此过程中门体20沿第一方向X或第二方向Y不会发生位移,进而保证凸块25可以顺利脱离凹槽12。
这里,第一中间开启角度α11不大于10°,也就是说,大约在门体20开启至10°的过程中,凸块25就可以不受到凹槽12的限制作用,此时,可以是凸块25完全脱离凹槽12,或者是凸块25即使沿第一方向X或第二方向Y发生位移也不会与凹槽12相互干涉的状态。
结合图22至图25,当门体20处于由第一中间开启角度α11继续开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,第一切换件401与第二切换件402相对静止,第一上自由段4131与第一下自由段4141重合形成第一自由段S1,第二上自由段4151与第二下自由段4161重合形成第二自由段S2,第二轴体312于第二段L2内运动而带动第一轴体311由初始位置A1运动至停止位置A2,门体20由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动。
这里,侧棱23运动至位于外侧面13靠近容纳腔室S的一侧,也就是说,此时铰链组件30驱动侧棱23朝靠近容纳腔室S的一侧移动,在门体20打开过程中,可以避免因侧棱23凸伸出外侧面13而与周边的橱柜或墙体等产生干涉。
这里,为了尽量保证箱体10的开度,避免箱体10内的抽屉、搁物架等受门体20干涉而无法打开的问题,侧棱23朝靠近容纳腔室S的一侧移动至外侧面13所在的平面内之后,铰链组件30驱动侧棱23于该平面内运动并逐渐靠近容纳腔室S。
也就是说,此时在保证侧棱23不凸伸出对应的外侧面13的基础上,使得侧棱23尽量靠近外侧面13,如此,既可以避免门体20在打开过程中与周边的橱柜或墙体等产生干涉,又可以尽量保证箱体10的开度。
需要说明的是,在门体20处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,第四轴体322始终限位于限位段4222而使得切换组件40限位第二铰链件32。
另外,在此过程中,由于第一上自由段4131与第一下自由段4141始终重合成第一自由段S1,第二上自由段4151与第二下自由段4161始终重合成第二自由段S2,即第一切换件401与第二切换件402的运动轨迹完全相同,且第一轴体311于第一自由段S1运动,同时,第二轴体312于第二自由段S2运动,在该过程中第一切换件401与第二切换件402始终不会相互错开,即第一切换件401与第二切换件402保持相对静止,可避免第一上自由段4131与第一下自由段4141相互错位,同时避免第二上自由段4151与第二下自由段4161相互错位,如此,可确保第一轴体311于第一自由段S1顺畅运动,且第二轴体312于第二自由段S2顺畅运动。
结合图26至图29,当门体20处于由第一开启角度α1继续开启至第二开启角度α2的过程中时,第一切换件401及第二切换件402相对运动而使得第四轴体322脱离限位段4222,且第一轴体311和/或第二轴体312限位于锁止段4132、4142、4152、4162而使得切换组件40限位第一铰链件31。
这里,“第一切换件401及第二切换件402相对运动而使得第二铰链件32脱离切换组件40的限位,且第一轴体311和/或第二轴体312限位于锁止段4132、4142、4152、4162而使得切换组件40限位第一铰链件31”是指切换组件40与第二铰链件32之间相对运动而使得切换组件40与第二铰链件32之间不存在相互限位,切换组件40与第一铰链件31之间相对运动而使得切换组件40与第一铰链件31之间相互限位。
在本实施方式中,第一轴体311同时限位于第一上锁止段4132及第一下锁止段4142,第二轴体312同时限位于第二上锁止段4152及第二下锁止段4162,且第四轴体322脱离第四限位段4222,说明如下:
当门体20开启至第一开启角度α1时,第二轴体312由第二自由段S2运动至第二下锁止段4162并限位,此时第一轴体311及第二轴体312无法再相对第一自由段S1、第二自由段S2运动,且此时的第一轴体311邻近第一上锁止段4132及第一下锁止段4142,第二轴体312邻近第二上锁止段4152,第一上锁止段4132与第二上锁止段4152的轨迹适应第一轴体311及第二轴体312的运动路径。
当门体20在第一开启角度α1的基础上继续开启时,门体20带动连接门体20的第二铰链件32运动,第二铰链件32通过第三自由段4211及第四限位段4222而施加作用力于第三轴体321及第四轴体322处,进而第三轴体321及第四轴体322驱动第一切换件401及第二切换件402运动。
具体的,此时第一轴体311邻近第一上锁止段4132,第二轴体312邻近第二上锁止段4152,第一切换件401可相对第一轴体311及第二轴体312运动第一角度,直至第一轴体311限位于第一上锁止段4132,且第二轴体312限位于第二上锁止段4152,同时,第二切换件402以第五轴体50为圆心而相对第一轴体311运动第二角度,直至第一轴体311限位于第二上锁止段4152内,在此过程中,第二轴体312与第二下锁止段4162始终接触,第二角度大于第一角度。
也就是说,第一切换件401及第二切换件402均会转动一定角度,且第二切换件402的转动角度大于第一切换件401的转动角度,第一切换件401与第二切换件402之间也会产生相对运动而相互错开。
可以理解的是,第一切换件401及第二切换件402的转动过程没有一定的先后顺序,两者可以是同时转动的,比如说,第一切换件401与第二切换件402在某个转动角度范围内同步转动,而后第一切换件401与第二切换件 402相互错开。
实际操作中,第一切换件401及第二切换件402带动第一槽体411及第二槽体412分别相对第一轴体311及第二轴体312转动,第一轴体311脱离第一自由段S1并抵接至第一上锁止段4132及第一下锁止段4142,即第一轴体311同时限位于第一上锁止段4132及第一下锁止段4142,第二轴体312脱离第二自由段S2并抵接至第二上锁止段4152及第二下锁止段4162,即第二轴体312同时限位于第二上锁止段4152及第二下锁止段4162,同时,第二切换件402的运动使得第四轴体322脱离第四限位段4222。
可以理解的,当第一轴体311位于第一上锁止段4132及第一下锁止段4142处时,由于第一切换件401与第二切换件402是相互错开的,原本相互重合的第一上自由段4131与第一下自由段4141也会相互错开,此时相互错开的第一上自由段4131与第一下自由段4141限制第一轴体311脱离第一上锁止段4132及第一下锁止段4142,即可保证在门体20继续开启的过程中第一轴体311始终保持在第一上锁止段4132及第一下锁止段4142处。
同样的,当第二轴体312位于第二上锁止段4152及第二下锁止段4162处时,由于第一切换件401与第二切换件402是相互错开的,原本相互重合的第二上自由段4151与第二下自由段4161也会相互错开,此时相互错开的第二上自由段4151与第二下自由段4161限制第二轴体312脱离第二上锁止段4152及第二下锁止段4162,即可保证在门体20继续开启的过程中第二轴体312始终保持在第二上锁止段4152及第二下锁止段4162处。
另外,第二切换件402的转动角度大于第一切换件401的转动角度,即第二切换件402与第一切换件401之间相互错开,可进一步提高第一铰链件31与切换组件40之间的锁止效果,确保第一轴体311始终保持在第一上锁止段4132及第一下锁止段4142处,且第二轴体312始终保持在第二上锁止段4152及第二下锁止段4162处。
同时,当第一切换件401及第二切换件402相对运动时,位于第一切换件401上的第三轴体321与位于第二切换件402上的第四轴体322之间的间距发生变化,而第三轴体321始终位于第三自由段4211,第四轴体322则由第四限位段4222移动至第四自由段4221,即第四轴体322脱离第四限位段4222。
结合图30至图33,当门体20处于由第二开启角度α2继续开启至最大开启角度α3的过程中时,第一切换件401与第二切换件402相对静止,第三轴体321于第三自由段421运动,第四轴体322于第四自由段4221运动。
这里,第一开启角度α1的范围大致为80°~83°,第二开启角度α2大约为90°,最大开启角度α3大于90°,也就是说,在门体20开启至80°~83°的过程中,门体20先原地转动,再沿第一方向X产生位移,避免门体20在打开过程中与周边的橱柜或墙体等产生干涉,最后达到80°~83°,此后,门体20在继续打开至90°的过程中,切换组件40产生运动而使得门体20更换旋转轴继续转动,即在90°之后门体20以第三轴体321为旋转轴相对箱体10继续原地转动而进一步打开门体20。
可以理解的是,角度不以上述说明为限。
可以看到,本实施方式通过切换组件40对第一铰链件31、第二铰链件32的解锁、锁止作用,可以有效控制第一铰链件31及第二铰链件32的顺序切换,使得门体20可稳定开启。
可以理解的,当门体20处于闭合过程中时,即门体20由最大开启角度α3开始闭合时,切换组件40也可有效控制第一铰链件31及第二铰链件32的顺序切换,即当门体20处于由最大开启角度α3闭合至第二开启角度α2的过程中时,第三轴体321于第三自由段4211运动,第四轴体322于第四自由段4221运动,且切换组件40锁止第一铰链件31,当门体20处于由第二开启角度α2闭合至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,第一切换件401及第二切换件402相对运动而使得第一铰链件31脱离切换组件40的限位,且第四轴体322限位于第四限位段4222,切换组件40锁止第二铰链件32,当门体20处于由第一开启角度α1闭合至完全闭合的过程中时,第一轴体311于第一自由段S1运动,第二轴体312于第二自由段S2运动。
换句话说,门体20的闭合过程与门体20的开启过程是顺序相反的过程,通过切换组件40对第一铰链件31、第二铰链件32的解锁、锁止作用,可以有效控制门体20开启、闭合过程中第一铰链件31、第二铰链件32的切换顺序。
在本实施方式中,第一轴体311的中心与侧棱23之间为第一间距,第一轴体311的中心与前壁21之间为第二间距,第一轴体311的中心与侧壁22之间为第三间距,第三轴体312的中心与侧棱23之间为第四间距,第三轴体312的中心与前壁21之间为第五间距,第三轴体312的中心与侧壁22之间为第六间距,当门体20处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,第一间距、第二间距及第三间距均先保持不变后呈减小趋势,当门体20处于由第二开启角度α2继续开启至最大开启角度α3的过程中时,第四间距、第五间距及第六间距均保持不变。
另外,在本实施方式中,第一轴体311与第三轴体321相互错开,如此,可适用于嵌入式橱柜或容纳冰箱100的空间较小的场景。
结合图34,以冰箱100嵌设于橱柜200中的简单示意图为例作说明。
在本实施方式中,箱体10包括开口102及环绕开口102设置的前端面103,箱体10还包括容纳腔室S及邻近铰链组件30且在门体20转动路径延伸段上的外侧面13,门体20包括远离容纳腔室S的前壁21及始终夹设于前壁21及容纳腔室S之间的侧壁22,前壁21与侧壁22之间具有侧棱23。
这里,当门体20处于关闭状态开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,门体20以第一轴体311为轴转动,第一轴体311与前端面103之间具有第一距离,当门体20处于由第二开启角度α2继续开启至最大开启角度α3的过程中时,门体20以第三轴体321为轴转动,第三轴体321与前端面103之间具有第二距离,第二距离大于第一距离,如此,可大大提高全嵌式冰箱100的最大开启角度。
另外,第一轴体311与外侧面13之间具有第三距离,当门体20处于由第二开启角度α2继续开启至最大开启角度α3的过程中时,第三轴体321与外侧面13之间具有第四距离,第四距离小于第三距离,可进一步提高箱体10的开度。
具体说明如下:
在冰箱100的某些运动轨迹中,可以看做是门体20依次以第一轴体311及第三轴体321为轴相对门体20运动。
在本实施方式中,铰链组件30还包括配合第一轴体311的第二轴体312及配合第三轴体321的第四轴体322,为了简化说明,简单看做门体20先是以第一轴体311为轴进行转动,而后通过切换组件40切换至以第三轴体321为轴进行转动。
实际操作中,为了提高嵌入效果,较佳是使得冰箱100完全嵌入至橱柜200中,冰箱100为自由嵌入式冰箱,即橱柜200的前端201与门体20远离箱体10的一侧前壁21位于同一平面,或者是门体20的前壁21完全不凸伸出橱柜200的前端201。
现有技术中,冰箱均为单轴冰箱,且冰箱的旋转轴与冰箱侧壁及前壁之间需要保持一定的距离,如此,才能有足够的空间来满足发泡或其他工艺,即现有的冰箱的旋转轴位置大致位于图34中的第一轴体311位置,在这种情况下,将单轴冰箱嵌入至橱柜200之后,由于橱柜200夹设于前端201与内壁202之间的棱角203与门体20侧棱23对应设置,当门体20开启时,侧棱23会与门体20干涉而限制门体20的最大开启角度,而为了保证门体20的正常开启,现有技术的通常做法是增大橱柜200内壁202与冰箱100之间的间隙,该间隙大致需要为10cm左右,而这将严重影响嵌入效果,且不利于有限空间的合理利用。
结合图34,阴影区域表示处于关闭状态的门体20,当门体20处于开启过程中时,若门体20始终以第一轴体311为轴转动(即现有技术),参考图34中的虚线门体20’,由于第一轴体311靠近前端面103,即此时第一轴体311远离橱柜200的前端201,当门体20’开启至一定角度后,橱柜200的棱角203会与门体20’相互干涉而限制门体20’的最大开启角度。
而在本实施方式中,第三轴体321位于第一切换件401上,在门体20开启过程中,切换组件40相对第一铰链件31、第二铰链件32运动而使得第三轴体321逐渐远离前端面103,即第三轴体321逐渐朝靠近橱柜200的前端201的方向移动,亦即,此时整个门体20朝远离箱体10的方向运动,参考图34中的实线门体20,橱柜200棱角203对门体20的干涉作用大大减小,门体20开启至较大的角度才会有橱柜200棱角203相互干涉,从而大大提高了门体20的最大开启角度。
也就是说,本实施方式通过切换组件40的作用可使得后期门体20以第三轴体321为轴转动,在保证冰箱100自由嵌入橱柜200的前提下,可有效提高门体20的最大开启角度,进而便于用户操作冰箱100,可大大提高用户体验。
而且,本实施方式无需增大橱柜200内壁202与冰箱100之间的间隙,可以做到冰箱100与橱柜200的无缝连接,大大提高了嵌入效果。
另外,本实施方式的切换组件40在带动第三轴体321逐渐朝靠近橱柜200的前端201的方向移动的同时,也带动第三轴体321逐渐靠近橱柜200的内壁202,也就是说,当门体20以第三轴体321为轴进行转动时,此时的第三轴体321相较于第一轴体311更加靠近橱柜200的前端201及内壁202,如此,即可以提高门体20的最大开启角度,又可使得门体20远离箱体10以增加箱体10的开度,便于箱体10内搁物架、抽屉等的开闭,或者说,可便于物品的取放。
当然,最终作为旋转轴的第三轴体321也可位于其他位置,例如,当门体20以第三轴体321为轴进行转动时,此时的第三轴体321相较于第一轴体311靠近橱柜200的前端201,且第三轴体321相较于第一轴体311远离橱柜200的内壁202等等。
可以理解的是,切换组件40控制门体20开启、闭合过程中第一铰链件31、第二铰链件32的切换顺序,可有效避免门体20在开闭过程中与橱柜200相互干扰。
另外,需要说明的是,通过具体的轴体槽体设计可有效控制门体20的运动轨迹,在本实施方式中,箱体10包括连接铰链组件30的枢转侧P,当门体20处于开启过程中时,铰链组件30至少驱动门体20由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动,从而避免门体20在打开过程中与周边的橱柜或墙体等产生干涉,轴体槽体的具体设计可参考下面的实施方式。
在本实施方式中,位于门体20不同区域的铰链组件30结构会有区别,上述铰链组件30为位于门体20上方与箱体10之间的铰链组件30,下面,结合图35及图36,简单介绍位于门体20下方与箱体10之间的铰链组件30’。
下方的铰链组件30’与上方的铰链组件30的区别在于:下方铰链组件30’的第一铰链件31’上具有凸部313’,第二铰链件32’上具有对应的卡勾323’,卡勾323’为弹性件,当门体20处于闭合状态时,凸部313’作用卡勾323’发生形变而使得门体20与箱体10紧密配合,当门体20处于开启过程中时,门体20带动卡勾323’运动,卡勾323’发生形变而脱离凸部313’。
也就是说,当门体20处于闭合状态时,凸部313’与卡勾323’之间为过盈配合,增强了门体20的闭合效果。
需要注意的是,由于第一铰链件31’与第二铰链件32’之间连接有切换组件40’,第二铰链件32’还包括沿厚度方向途径切换组件40’的延伸段324’,延伸段324’连接卡勾323’,如此,可使得卡勾323’呈水平设置且可与凸部313’相互适配。
结合图37至图43,为本发明第二实施方式的冰箱的相关示意图,为了便于说明及理解,本实施方式与第一实施方式相同或类似的结构采用相同或类似的编号,下同。
在本实施方式中,冰箱100a为对开门冰箱100a。
箱体10a包括连接铰链组件30a的枢转侧P、容纳腔室S以及将容纳腔室S分隔为第一间室S3及第二间室S4的固定梁70a。
门体20a包括对应第一间室S3设置的第一门体204a及对应第二间室S4设置的第二门体205a。
这里,“枢转侧P”定义为门体20a相对箱体10a转动的区域,即设置有铰链组件30a的区域,枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S的方向定义为第一方向X,容纳腔室S朝向枢转侧P的方向定义为第二方向Y。
具体的,本实施方式的冰箱100a左右两侧均设有铰链组件30a,箱体10a包括左侧枢转侧P1及右侧枢转侧P2,当枢转侧P为左侧枢转侧P1(即枢转侧P对应第一门体204a)时,第一方向X为从左至右的方向,第二方向Y为从右至左的方向,当枢转侧P为右侧枢转侧P2(即枢转侧P对应第二门体205a)时,第一方向X为从右至左的方向,第二方向Y为从左至右的方向,也就是说,对应不同的枢转侧P,第一方向X与第二方向Y的实际方向是不同的,后续说明以枢转侧P为左侧枢转侧P1为例。
另外,固定梁70a延伸至箱体10a的开口处,固定梁70a靠近门体20a的一侧为具有一定宽度的接触面71a。
铰链组件30a包括固定于箱体10a的第一铰链件31a、固定于门体20a的第二铰链件32a以及连接第一铰链件31a及第二铰链件32a的切换组件40a。
本实施方式的铰链组件30a与第一实施方式中的铰链组件30的结构相同,因此,可参考第一实施方式中的铰链组件30的说明。
在本实施方式中,第一铰链件31a与切换组件40a之间通过相互配合的第一轴体组311a、312a及第一槽体组411a、412a实现相对运动,第一轴体组311a、312a包括第一轴体311a及第二轴体312a,第一槽体组411a、412a包括第一自由段S1、第二自由段S2及锁止段4132a、4142a、4152a、4162a,第一自由段S1包括相对设置的初始位置A1及停止位置A2,第二自由段S2包括相连的第一段L1及第二段L2。
第二铰链件32a与切换组件40a之间通过相互配合的第二轴体组321a、322a及第二槽体组421a、422a实现相对运动,第二轴体组321a、322a包括第三轴体321a及第四轴体322a,第二槽体组421a、422a包括第三自由段421a、第四自由段4221a及限位段4222a。
当门体20a处于关闭状态时,第一轴体311a位于初始位置A1,第二轴体312a位于第一段L1远离第二段L2的一端,且第四轴体322a位于限位段4222a而使得切换组件40a限位第二铰链件32a,第一门体204a及第二门体205a均与固定梁70a接触。
这里,第一门体204a及第二门体205a靠近箱体10a的一侧可设有门封,当门体20a处于关闭状态时,门封与固定梁70a的接触面71a接触可实现门体20a的完全闭合,避免箱体10a内冷气泄露。
当门体20a处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时(参考第一实施方式),第一轴体311a于初始位置A1原地转动,第二轴体312a以第一轴体311a为圆心而于第一段L1内运动,门体20a相对箱体10a原地转动,而后第二轴体312a于第二段L2内运动而带动第一轴体311a由初始位置A1运动至停止位置A2,门体20a由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动。
具体的,当门体20a处于由关闭状态开启至第一中间开启角度α11的过程中时,第一轴体311a于初始位置A1原地转动,第二轴体312a以第一轴体311a为圆心而于第一段L1内运动,门体20a相对箱体10a原地转动,门体20a远离固定梁70a。
这里,当门体20a处于由关闭状态开启至第一中间开启角度α11的过程中时,门体20a相对箱体10a原地转动,即门体20a仅转动而不产生其他方向的位移,可以有效避免因门体20a某个方向的位移而导致门体20a无法正常开启。
此时,若第一门体204a在开启时产生水平方向的位移,那么第一门体204a与第二门体205a之间会产生相互干涉而导致第一门体204a、第二门体205a无法正常开启,而本实施方式的冰箱100a在开启时第一门体204a、第二门体205a是原地转动的,可以有效避免相邻的第一门体204a及第二门体205a之间相互干涉。
当门体20a处于由第一中间开启角度α11开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时(参考第一实施方式),第二轴体312a于第二段L2内运动而带动第一轴体311a由初始位置A1运动至停止位置A2,门体20a由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动。
这里,当门体20a处于由第一中间开启角度α11继续开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,门体20a朝向容纳腔室S的一侧移动,即此时门体20a既相对箱体10a发生转动又相对箱体10a沿第一方向X产生了位移,如此,门体20a在转动过程中朝远离容纳腔室S的一侧凸伸出箱体10a的距离会大大减小,即门体20a沿第一方向X产生的位移抵消了门体20a转动过程中沿第二方向Y凸伸出箱体10a的部分,从而避免门体20a在打开过程中与周边的橱柜或墙体等产生干涉,适用于嵌入式橱柜或容纳冰箱100a的空间较小的场景。
当门体20a处于由第一开启角度α1继续开启至第二开启角度α2的过程中时(参考第一实施方式),第四轴体322a脱离限位段4222a,且第一轴体311a和/或第二轴体312a限位于锁止段4132a、4142a、4152a、4162a而使得切换组件40a限位第一铰链件31a。
当门体20a处于由第二开启角度α2继续开启至最大开启角度α3的过程中时(参考第一实施方式),第三轴体321a于第三自由段421a内原地转动,第四轴体322a以第三轴体321a为圆心而于第四自由段4221a运动,门体20a相对箱体10a继续原地转动。
需要说明的是,本实施方式的铰链组件30a及工作原理的其他说明可以参考第一实施方式,在此不再赘述。
结合图44至图73,为本发明第三实施方式的冰箱的相关示意图。
在第三实施方式中,铰链组件30b包括固定于箱体10b的第一铰链件31b、固定于门体20b的第二铰链件32b以及连接第一铰链件31b及第二铰链件32b的切换组件40b。
需要说明的是,本实施方式的铰链组件30b可以适用于第一实施方式中的多门冰箱100及第二实施方式中的对开门冰箱100a,当然,也可以是其他冰箱。
结合图44至图48,第一铰链件31b与切换组件40b之间通过相互配合的第一轴体311b及第一槽体411b实现相对运动,第一槽体411b包括第一自由段S1。
第二铰链件32b与切换组件40b之间通过相互配合的第二轴体组321b、322b及第二槽体组421b、422b实现相对运动,第二轴体组321b、322b包括第三轴体321b及第四轴体322b,第二槽体组421b、422b包括第三自由段421b、第四自由段4221b及限位段4222b,第三自由段421b包括相对设置的起始位置B1及枢转位置B2,第四自由段4221b包括依次相连的移动段M1及转动段M2。
当门体20b处于关闭状态时(可参考图49至图52),第一轴体311b位于第一自由段S1,第四轴体322b位于限位段4222b而使得切换组件40b限位第二铰链件32b,第三轴体321b位于起始位置B1。
当门体20b处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时(可参考图53至图56),第一轴体311b于第一自由段S1内原地转动而带动门体20b相对箱体10b原地转动。
当门体20b处于由第一开启角度α1继续开启至第二开启角度α2的过程中时(可参考图57至图60),第四轴体322b脱离限位段4222b,第三轴体321b保持在起始位置B1,切换组件40b限位第一铰链件31b。
当门体20b处于由第二开启角度α2继续开启至最大开启角度α3的过程中时(可参考图61至图68),第四轴体322b于移动段M1内运动而带动第三轴体321b由起始位置B1运动至枢转位置B2,门体由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动,而后第三轴体321b于枢转位置B2原地转动,第四轴体322b以第三轴体321b为圆心而于转动段M2运动,门体20b相对箱体10b继续原地转动。
具体的,当门体20b处于由第二开启角度α2继续开启至第一中间开启角度α21的过程中时(可参考图61至图64),第四轴体322b于移动段M1内运动而带动第三轴体321b由起始位置B1b运动至枢转位置B2,门体由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动。
这里,当门体20b处于第二开启角度α2继续开启至第一中间开启角度α21的过程中时,门体20b朝向容纳腔室S的一侧移动,即此时门体20b相对箱体10b沿第一方向X产生了位移,如此,门体20b在转动过程中朝远离容纳腔室S的一侧凸伸出箱体10b的距离会大大减小,即门体20b沿第一方向X产生的位移抵消了门体20b转动过程中沿第二方向Y凸伸出箱体10b的部分,从而避免门体20b在打开过程中与周边的橱柜或墙体等产生干涉,适用于嵌入式橱柜或容纳冰箱100b的空间较小的场景。
当门体20b处于由第一中间开启角度α21继续开启至第三开启角度α3的过程中时(可参考图65至图68),第三轴体321b保持在枢转位置B2,第四轴体322b以第三轴体321b为圆心而于转动段M2运动,门体20b相对箱体10b继续原地转动。
继续结合图44至图48,第一铰链件31b包括第一轴体311b,切换组件40b包括第一槽体411b、第三轴体321b及第四轴体322b,第二铰链件32b包括具有第三自由段421b的第三槽体421b及具有第四自由段4221b、限位段4222b的第四槽体422b,第三槽体421b包括相对设置的起始位置B1及枢转位置B2,第四槽体422b包括依次相连的限位段4222b、移动段M1及转动段M2。
这里,“依次相连”是指第四轴体322b依次经过限位段4222b、移动段M1及转动段M2,各段之间可以重叠、往复或呈折线等等。
在本实施方式中,第三槽体421b呈椭圆形,起始位置B1及枢转位置B2为椭圆形长轴方向的两个端点;第四槽体422b中的限位段4222b、移动段M1及转动段M2相互不重叠。
切换组件40b包括相互配合的第一切换件401b及第二切换件402b。
第一铰链件31b包括第一限位部314b,第一切换件401b包括第二限位部4016b,第一限位部314b及第二限位部4016b的其中之一为凸块314b,其中另一为凹陷部4016b,凸块314b包括第一限位面3141b,凹陷部4016b包括第二限位面4017b。
在本实施方式中,凹陷部4016b位于第一切换件401b,凸块314b位于第一铰链件314b。
在其他实施方式中,凸块314b及凹陷部4016b的位置可以互换,另外,也可以是其他限位结构。
第一槽体411b包括位于第一切换件401b的第一上槽体413b及位于第二切换件402b的第一下槽体414b,第一自由段S1包括第一上槽体413b及第一下槽体414b。
第一上槽体413b的开口尺寸与第一轴体311b相互匹配,第一下槽体414b的开口尺寸大于第一上槽体413b的开口尺寸。
这里,第一上槽体413b呈圆形,第一下槽体414b呈椭圆形,但不以此为限。
在本实施方式中,第一切换件401b相较于第二切换件402b靠近第一铰链件31b,即第一铰链件31b、第一切换件401b、第二切换件402b及第二铰链件32b之间依次叠置。
在本实施方式中,结合图47及图48,第一切换件401b包括第一止挡部4018b,第二切换件402b包括与第一止挡部4018b配合的第二止挡部4027b,当门体20b处于由第二开启角度α2闭合至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,第二切换件402b通过第二止挡部4027b与第一止挡部4018b的配合限制第一切换件401b的运动。
具体的,第一止挡部4018b为位于第一切换件401b上的槽体部4018b,第二止挡部4027b为位于第二切换件402b上的突起部4027b,槽体部4018b的一端为止挡端4019b,当门体20b处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,第一切换件401b与第二切换件402b相对静止,突起部4027b保持在槽体部4018b远离止挡端4019b的一侧,当门体20b处于由第一开启角度α1开启至第二开启角度α2的过程中时,第一切换件401b与第二切换件402b相对运动,突起部402b于槽体部4018b内朝靠近止挡端4019b的一侧运动,直至突起部402b抵接止挡端4019b,第一切换件401b与第二切换件402b相对静止。
可以理解的,在门体20b开启过程中,可通过其他结构来控制第一切换件401b与第二切换件402b之间的相对运动,例如,通过第一切换件401b及第二切换件402b上的槽体与第一轴体311b、第三轴体321b的抵持来使得第一切换件401b与第二切换件402b结束相对运动,此时,第一切换件401b与第二切换件402b保持相对静止且处于相互错开状态,较佳的,当第一切换件401b与第二切换件402b结束相对运动时,突起部402b恰好抵接止挡端4019b,但不以此为限。
突起部402b与槽体部4018b的相互作用主要在门体20b闭合过程中起作用,实际操作中,当门体20b处于由第二开启角度α2闭合至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,由于突起部402b抵接止挡端4019b,在第二切换件402b不转动的情况下,第一切换件401b无法转动,也就是说,在此过程中,必然是第一切换件401b的转动晚于第二切换件402b的转动,且当第一切换件401b与第二切换件402b重叠之后两者相对静止,而后第一切换件401b与第二切换件402b一起相对第一轴体311b运动直至门体20b闭合。
可以理解的,门体20b的闭合过程与门体20b的开启过程是顺序相反的过程,通过切换组件40b对第一铰链件31b、第二铰链件32b的解锁、锁止作用,可以有效控制门体20b开启、闭合过程中第一铰链件31b、第二铰链件32b的切换顺序。
下面,介绍铰链组件30b的具体工作流程。
在本实施方式中,箱体10b包括邻近铰链组件30b且在门体20b转动路径延伸段上的外侧面13b,门体20b包括远离容纳腔室S的前壁21b及始终夹设于前壁21b及容纳腔室S之间的侧壁22b,前壁21b与侧壁22b之间具有侧棱23b。
结合图49至图52,当门体20b处于关闭状态时,第一切换件401b与第二切换件402b相对静止,第一轴体311b位于第一自由段S1,第四轴体322b位于限位段4222b而使得切换组件40b限位第二铰链件32b,第三轴体321b位于起始位置B1。
具体的,外侧面13b与侧壁22b位于同一平面,可以保证外观上的流畅性,提高美观度,且也便于门体20b的安装,但不以此为限。
这里,需要说明的是,当门体20b处于关闭状态时,第三轴体321b位于起始位置B1,第四轴体322b限位于限位段4222b内,第三轴体321b与第四轴体322b之间的间距保持不变,且第三轴体321b位于第一切换件401b,第四轴体322b位于第二切换件402b,在第三轴体321b及第四轴体322b的共同限位下,第一切换件401b与第二切换件402b相对静止。
结合图53至图56,当门体20b处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,第一切换件401b与第二切换件402b相对静止,第一上槽体413b与第一下槽体414b重叠部分形成第一自由段S1,第一轴体311b于第一自由段S1内原地转动,凹陷部4016b抵接凸块314b而使得切换组件40b限位所述第一铰链件31b,门体20b相对箱体10b原地转动。
这里,当门体20b处于关闭状态时,凸块314b位于凹陷部4016b中,第一限位面3141b远离第二限位面4017b,当门体20b处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,第一铰链件31b固定于箱体10b,门体20b带动切换组件40b一起相对第一铰链件31b运动,凸块314b于凹陷部4016b内运动,第一限位面3141b与第二限位面4017b逐渐靠近直至第一限位面3141b抵接第二限位面4017b,此时,第一切换件401b无法再相对第一铰链件31b转动,即切换组件40b实现了对第一铰链件31b的锁止,可通过控制凸块314b及凹陷部4016b的尺寸、形状等控制第一限位面3141b抵接第二限位面4017b时门体20b的转动角度。
本实施方式在门体20b开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中门体20b相对箱体10b原地转动,保证在此过程中门体20b沿第一方向X或第二方向Y不会发生位移。
需要说明的是,在门体20b处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,第四轴体322b始终限位于限位段4222b而使得切换组件40b限位第二铰链件32b。
结合图57至图60,当门体20b处于由第一开启角度α1继续开启至第二开启角度α2的过程中时,第一切换件401b及第二切换件402b相对运动而使得第四轴体322b脱离限位段4222b,第三轴体321b保持在起始位置B1。
具体的,当第一切换件401b及第二切换件402b相对运动时,位于第一切换件401b上的第三轴体321b与位于第二切换件402b上的第四轴体322b之间的间距发生变化,而第三轴体321b始终位于起始位置B1,第四轴体322b则由限位段4222b移动至第四自由段4221b,即第四轴体322b脱离限位段4222b。
需要说明的是,第一铰链件31b的锁止不以上述凸块314b及凹陷部4016b的配合为限,在其他实施方式中,也可以是其他结构来实现对第一铰链件31b的锁止,例如通过锁止第一轴体311b来实现对第一铰链件31b的锁止,具体的,可以在第一槽体411b处设置锁止段,当第一轴体311b转动至锁止段处时可实现对第一轴体311b的锁止,又或者是,第一切换件401b与第二切换件402b相对运动而使得第一上槽体413b与第一下槽体414b之间形成锁止段,该锁止段可用来锁止第一轴体311b。
结合图61至图64,当门体20b处于由第二开启角度α2继续开启至第一中间开启角度α21的过程中时,第一切换件401b与第二切换件402b相对静止,第四轴体322b于移动段M1内运动而带动第三轴体321b由起始位置B1运动至枢转位置B2,门体由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动。
这里,侧棱23b运动至位于外侧面13b靠近容纳腔室S的一侧,也就是说,此时铰链组件30b驱动侧棱23b朝靠近容纳腔室S的一侧移动,在门体20b打开过程中,可以避免因侧棱23b凸伸出外侧面13b而与周边的橱柜或墙体等产生干涉。
这里,为了尽量保证箱体10b的开度,避免箱体10b内的抽屉、搁物架等受门体20b干涉而无法打开的问题,侧棱23b朝靠近容纳腔室S的一侧移动至外侧面13b所在的平面内之后,铰链组件30b驱动侧棱23b于该平面内运 动并逐渐靠近容纳腔室S。
也就是说,此时在保证侧棱23b不凸伸出对应的外侧面13b的基础上,使得侧棱23b尽量靠近外侧面13b,如此,既可以避免门体20b在打开过程中与周边的橱柜或墙体等产生干涉,又可以尽量保证箱体10b的开度。
在本实施方式中,起始位置B1与枢转位置B2之间的连线平行于移动段M1,也就是说,第四轴体322b于移动段M1内平移而带动第三轴体321b由起始位置B1平移至枢转位置B2,此时,门体20b由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S平移。
结合图65至图68,当门体20b处于由第一中间开启角度α21继续开启至最大开启角度α3的过程中时,第一切换件401b与第二切换件402b相对静止,第三轴体321b保持在枢转位置B2,第四轴体322b以第三轴体321b为圆心而于转动段M2运动,门体20b相对箱体10b继续原地转动。
可以看到,本实施方式通过切换组件40b对第一铰链件31b、第二铰链件32b的解锁、锁止作用,可以有效控制第一铰链件31b及第二铰链件32b的顺序切换,使得门体20b可稳定开启。
在本实施方式中,第三轴体312b的中心与侧棱23b之间为第四间距,第三轴体312b的中心与前壁21b之间为第五间距,第三轴体312b的中心与侧壁22b之间为第六间距,当门体20b处于由第二开启角度α2继续开启至最大开启角度α3的过程中时,第四间距、第五间距及第六间距均先呈减小趋势后保持不变。
需要说明的是,间距变化不以上述说明为限,例如,当门体20b处于由第二开启角度α2继续开启至第一中间开启角度α21的过程中时,第五间距始终保持不变,而第四间距及第六间距均先呈减小趋势后呈增大趋势后保持不变等等。
本发明的运动轨迹不以上述说明为限,结合图69至图73,为第三实施方式中的另一实施方式的铰链组件示意图,为了便于说明,相同或类似的结构采用相同或类似的编号,本实施方式与第三实施方式的区别主要在第二铰链件32b’处,第一铰链件31b’的说明可参考第三实施方式,在此不再赘述。
第二铰链件32b’包括第三槽体421bb’及第四槽体422b’,第三槽体421b’包括相对设置的起始位置B1’及枢转位置B2’,第四槽体422b’包括依次相连的限位段4222b’、移动段M1’及转动段M2’。
这里,第三槽体421b’呈椭圆形,移动段M1’呈弧形,限位段4222b’、移动段M1’及转动段M2’互相不重叠。
需要说明的是,“第三槽体421b’呈椭圆形”是指第三轴体321b’于第三槽体421b’内是沿着直线运动的,“移动段M1’呈弧形”是指第四轴体322b’于移动段M1’内是沿着弧线运动的,也就是说,第四轴体322b’于移动段M1’内转动而带动第三轴体321b’由起始位置B1’平移至枢转位置B2’。
具体的,当门体20b处于关闭状态以及门体20b处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,结合图70,第一切换件401b’与第二切换件402b’相对静止,第三轴体321b’位于起始位置B1’,第四轴体322b’位于限位段4222b’而限位第二铰链件32b’。
当门体20b处于由第一开启角度α1继续开启至第二开启角度α2的过程中时,结合图71,第一切换件401b’及第二切换件402b’相对运动而使得第四轴体322b’脱离限位段4222b’,第三轴体321b’保持在起始位置B1’。
当门体20b处于由第二开启角度α2继续开启至第一中间开启角度α21的过程中时,结合图72,第一切换件401b’与第二切换件402b’相对静止,第四轴体322b’于移动段M1’内转动而带动第三轴体321b’由起始位置B1’平移至枢转位置B2’,门体由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动。
当门体20b处于由第一中间开启角度α21继续开启至最大开启角度α3的过程中时,结合图73,第一切换件401b’与第二切换件402b’相对静止,第三轴体321b’保持在枢转位置B2’,第四轴体322b’以第三轴体321b’为圆心而于转动段M2’运动,门体20b相对箱体10b继续原地转动。
本实施方式的其他说明可以参考上一实施方式,在此不再赘述。
需要说明的是,本发明的第三槽体421b及第四槽体422b也可为其他形态,仅需保证可实现本发明的运动轨迹即可。
本发明的第一轴体311b与第三轴体321b相互错开,如此,可适用于嵌入式橱柜或容纳冰箱100b的空间较小的场景。
需要说明的是,本实施方式的铰链组件30b及工作原理的其他说明可以参考其他实施方式,在此不再赘述。
结合图74至图96,为本发明第四实施方式的冰箱的相关示意图。
在第四实施方式中,铰链组件30c包括固定于箱体10c的第一铰链件31c、固定于门体20c的第二铰链件32c以及连接第一铰链件31c及第二铰链件32c的切换组件40c。
需要说明的是,本实施方式的铰链组件30c可以适用于第一实施方式中的多门冰箱100及第二实施方式中的对开门冰箱100a,当然,也可以是其他冰箱。
箱体10c包括邻近铰链组件30c且在门体20c转动路径延伸段上的外侧面13c。
门体20c包括远离容纳腔室S的前壁21c及始终夹设于前壁21c及容纳腔室S之间的侧壁22c,前壁21c与侧壁22c之间具有侧棱23c。
铰链组件30c包括固定于箱体10c的第一铰链件31c、固定于门体20c的第二铰链件32c以及连接第一铰链件31c及第二铰链件32c的切换组件40c。
切换组件40c包括相互配合的第一切换件401c及第二切换件402c,第一切换件401c相较于第二切换件402c靠近第一铰链件31c,即第一铰链件31c、第二铰链件32c及切换组件40c之间的安装顺序为第一铰链件31c、第一切换件401c、第二切换件402c及第二铰链件32c,第一铰链件31c、第一切换件401c、第二切换件402c及第二铰链件32c之间依次叠置,但不以此为限。
当门体20c处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,第一切换件401c、第二切换件402c及第二铰链件32c相对静止并一起相对第一铰链件31c运动,门体20c相对箱体10c原地转动,当门体20c处于由第一开启角度α1继续开启至第二开启角度α2的过程中时,第一切换件401c与第一铰链件31c相对静止,第二切换件402c与第二铰链件32c相对静止并一起相对第一切换件401c运动,门体20c由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动,当门体20c处于由第二开启角度α2继续开启至最大开启角度α3的过程中时,第一铰链件31c、第一切换件401c及第二切换件402c相对静止,第二铰链件32c相对第二切换件402c运动,门体20c相对箱体10c继续原地转动。
可以看到,通过切换组件40c连接第一铰链件31c及第二铰链件32c可使得门体20c在开启过程中切换旋转轴,具体是门体20c处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中产生的原地转动的旋转轴区别于门体20c处于由第二开启角度α2继续开启至最大开启角度α3的过程中产生的原地转动的旋转轴,如此,可通过切换旋转轴的方式改变门体20c的运动轨迹,以使得冰箱100c可适应嵌入式应用场景,另外,本实施方式的门体20c在开启过程中由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动,可避免门体20c在打开过程中与周边的橱柜或墙体等产生干涉,进一步适用于嵌入式橱柜或容纳冰箱100c的空间较小的场景,铰链组件30c的具体结构参考后续说明。
在本实施方式中,结合图75及图76,第一铰链件31c包括第一轴体311c,第一轴体311c垂直延伸。
第一切换件401c包括第三轴体321c及第一上槽体413c。
这里,第三轴体321c位于第一切换件401c靠近第二切换件402c的一侧,第三轴体321c垂直延伸,第一上槽体413c为贯穿孔结构,第一上槽体413c呈圆形,且第一上槽体413c的开口尺寸与第一轴体311c的外径相适配,使得第一轴体311c于第一上槽体413c内仅能发生转动而无法移动。
第二切换件402c包括第四轴体322c及通孔4026c。
这里,第四轴体322c位于第二切换件402c靠近第二铰链件32c的一侧,第四轴体322c垂直延伸,通孔4026c呈椭圆形,通孔4026c包括相对设置的初始位置A1及停止位置A2,初始位置A1及停止位置A2为椭圆形长轴方向的两个端点,另外,第二切换件402c还包括第一下槽体414c,第一轴体311c依次穿过第一上槽体413c及第一下槽体414c,第一下槽体414c呈椭圆形,第一下槽体414c包括相对设置的第一端B1及第二端B2,第一端B1及第二端B2为椭圆形长轴方向的两个端点,第一下槽体414c平行于通孔4026c。
第二铰链件32c包括第三槽体421c及第四槽体422c。
这里,第二铰链件32c可为与门体20c配合的轴套,第三槽体421c呈椭圆形,第三槽体421c包括相对设置的起始位置C1及枢转位置C2,起始位置C1及枢转位置C2为椭圆形长轴方向的两个端点,第四槽体422c包括相对设置的转动起始位置D1及转动停止位置D2,第四槽体422c为圆弧槽,且圆弧槽的圆心为第三槽体421c的枢转位置C2。
在本实施方式中,继续结合图75及图76,第一铰链件31c包括第一限位部314c,第一切换件401c包括第二限位部4016c,第一限位部314c及第二限位部4016c的其中之一为凸块314c,其中另一为凹陷部4016c,凸块314c包括第一限位面3141c,凹陷部4016c包括第二限位面4017c。
在本实施方式中,凹陷部4016c位于第一切换件401c,凸块314c位于第一铰链件314c。
在其他实施方式中,凸块314c及凹陷部4016c的位置可以互换,或者,也可以是其他限位结构。
另外,第一铰链件31c还包括第一卡合部315c及第二卡合部316c,第一切换件401c包括第三卡合部405c,第一卡合部315c及第二卡合部316c均为凹口,第三卡合部405c包括第三弹性件4052c及第三凸台4051c。
这里,第一切换件401c靠近第一铰链件31c的一侧设置有第一异形槽4053c,第三弹性件4052c及第三凸台4051c限位于第一异形槽4053c,第一异形槽4053c的内壁设有第一卡位部4054c,第三凸台4051c的外壁设有与第一卡位部4054c配合的第一凸棱4055c,如此,在第三弹性件4052c的作用下,第三凸台4051c仅能相对第一异形槽4053c沿竖直方向运动,第三弹性件4052c为弹簧,第三凸台4051c的外表面大致为圆弧面。
在本实施方式中,继续结合图75及图76,第一切换件401c包括第四卡合部4031c及第五卡合部4032c,第二切换件402c包括第六卡合部404c,第四卡合部4031c及第五卡合部4032c均为凹口,第六卡合部404c包括第六弹性件4042c及第六凸台4041c。
这里,第二切换件402c靠近第一切换件401c的一侧设置有第二异形槽4043c,第六弹性件4042c及第六凸台4041c限位于第二异形槽4043c,第二异形槽4043c的内壁设有第二卡位部4044c,第六凸台4041c的外壁设有与第二卡位部4044c配合的第二凸棱4045c,如此,在第六弹性件4042c的作用下,第六凸台4041c仅能相对第二异形槽4043c沿竖直方向运动,第六弹性件4042c为弹簧,第六凸台4041c的外表面大致为圆弧面。
继续结合图75及图76,第一切换件401c及第二切换件402c还通过第五轴体50c、第六槽体418c及第五槽体417c配合,第六槽体418c位于第一切换件401c,第六槽体418c与第五轴体417c相互匹配,第五槽体417c位于第二切换件402c,第五槽体417c包括相对设置的第三端E1及第四端E2,第五槽体417c平行于通孔4026c,且第五槽体417c呈椭圆形,第三端E1及第四端E2为椭圆形长轴方向的两个端点。
这里,第五轴体50c为两端尺寸较大中间尺寸较小的结构,第五轴体50c依次通过第六槽体418c及第五槽体417c,且第五轴体50c尺寸较大的两端分别位于第一切换件401c的上侧及第二切换件402c的下侧,如此,可实现第一切换件401c及第二切换件402c的相对运动,且第一切换件401c及第二切换件402c不会相互分离,在其他实施方式中,第五轴体50c可与第一切换件401c相互固定。
下面,介绍铰链组件30c的具体工作流程。
结合图77至图81,当门体20c处于关闭状态时,第一切换件401c与第二切换件402c相对静止,第一轴体311c延伸至第一上槽体413c,第三轴体321c依次穿过通孔4026c及第三槽体421c,且第三轴体321c位于初始位置A1及起始位置C1,第四轴体322c位于第四槽体422c的转动起始位置D1,另外,第一轴体311c还延伸至第一下槽体414c并位于第一端B1,第五轴体50c位于第五槽体417c的第三端E1。
此时,第一限位部314c的第一限位面3141c远离第二限位部4016c的第二限位面4017c。
第三卡合部405c限位于第一卡合部315c,即第三弹性件4052c作用所述第三凸台4051c限位于第一卡合部315c,此时,第三卡合部405c及第一卡合部315c可作为闭合件而辅助提高门体20c的闭合效果。
第六卡合部404c限位于第四卡合部4031c,即第六弹性件4042c作用第六凸台4041c限位于第四卡合部4031c,此时,第六卡合部404c与第四卡合部4031c可相互配合而辅助实现第一切换件401c及第二切换件42c的相对静止。
外侧面13c与侧壁22c位于同一平面,可以保证外观上的流畅性,提高美观度,且也便于门体20c的安装,但不以此为限。
结合图82至图86,当门体20c处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,第一切换件401c、第二切换件402c及第二铰链件32c相对静止并一起相对第一铰链件31c运动,此时,第一轴体311c于第一上槽体413c内原地转动而带动门体20c相对箱体10c原地转动。
这里,当门体20c处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,第一轴体311c保持在第一下槽体414c的第一端B1,第三轴体321c保持在初始位置A1及起始位置C1,第四轴体322c保持在转动起始位置D1,第五轴体50c保持在第五槽体417c的第三端E1。
具体的,当门体20c处于关闭状态时,第三轴体321c同时位于初始位置A1及起始位置C1,第四轴体322c位于转动起始位置D1,第三轴体321c与第四轴体322c之间的间距保持不变,且第三轴体321c位于第一切换件401c,第四轴体322c位于第二切换件402c,在第三轴体321c及第四轴体322c的共同限位下,第一切换件401c与第二切换件402c相对静止,且由于第四槽体422c是以第三槽体421c的枢转位置C2为圆心的圆弧槽,当第三轴体321c位于起始位置C1时,第四轴体322c不会在第四槽体422c中移动,即此时第二铰链件32c、第一切换件401c及第二切换件402c同时保持相对静止,此时,用户施力于门体20c而带动门体20c开启时,第一切换件401c、第二切换件402c及第二铰链件32c相对静止并一起相对第一铰链件31c运动。
本实施方式在门体20c开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中门体20c相对箱体10c原地转动,保证在此过程中门体20c沿第一方向X或第二方向Y不会发生位移。
需要说明的是,在门体20c处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,第三轴体321c始终位于起始位置C1,第四轴体322c始终位于转动起始位置D1,即切换组件40c限位第二铰链件32c。
这里,当门体20c处于关闭状态时,凸块314c位于凹陷部4016c中,第一限位面3141c远离第二限位面4017c,当门体20c处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度α1的过程中时,第一铰链件31c固定于箱体10c,门体20c带动第一切换件401c、第二切换件402c及第二铰链件32c一起相对第一铰链件31c运动,凸块314c于凹陷部4016c内运动,第一限位面3141c与第二限位面4017c逐渐靠近直至第一限位面3141c抵接第二限位面4017c,此时,第 一切换件401c无法再相对第一铰链件31c转动,即切换组件40c实现了对第一铰链件31c的锁止,可通过控制凸块314c及凹陷部4016c的尺寸、形状等控制第一限位面3141c抵接第二限位面4017c时门体20c的转动角度。
同时,在该开启过程中,第三卡合部405c脱离第一卡合部315c,且第三卡合部405c与第二卡合部316c逐渐靠近直至第三卡合部405c限位于第二卡合部316c,具体的,第一铰链件31c的底面抵接第三凸台4051c而驱动所述第三弹性件4052c压缩,且当第三凸台4051c接触第二卡合部316c时,第三弹性件4052c复位而带动第三凸台4051c进入第二卡合部316c,可进一步限制第一切换件401c继续相对第一铰链件31c转动。
可以看到,当门体20c开启至第一开启角度α1时,第三凸台4051c及第二卡合部316c相互限位,同时第一限位面3141c与第二限位面4017c相互限位,双重限位避免第一切换件401c继续相对第一铰链件31c转动,可以理解的是,此时也可省略第一限位面3141c与第二限位面4017c的限位,即在其他实施方式中,可省略设置第一限位部314c及第二限位部4016c。
另外,在该开启过程中,第六卡合部404c与第四卡合部4031c始终保持相互限位而辅助实现第一切换件401c及第二切换件42c的相对静止。
结合图87至图91,当门体20c处于由第一开启角度α1继续开启至第二开启角度α2的过程中时,第一切换件401c与第一铰链件31c相对静止,第二切换件402c与第二铰链件32c相对静止并一起相对第一切换件401c运动,门体20c由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动。
这里,当门体20c处于由第一开启角度α1继续开启至第二开启角度α2的过程中时,第四轴体322c保持在转动起始位置D1,第一轴体311c由第一端B1运动至第二端B2,第三轴体321c由初始位置A1运动至停止位置A2,同时第三轴体321c由起始位置C1运动至枢转位置C2,第五轴体50c由第三端E1运动至第四端E2,如此,可实现门体20c由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动。
具体的,当门体20c开启至第一开启角度α1时,第一限位面3141c抵接第二限位面4017c而使得第一切换件401c无法再相对第一铰链件31c运动,和/或第三卡合部405c与第二卡合部316c相互限位而使得第一切换件401c无法再相对第一铰链件31c运动,即此时第一铰链件31c与第一切换件401c相对静止,而此时用户继续开启门体20c而使得门体20c处于由第一开启角度α1继续开启至第二开启角度α2的过程中时,由于第四槽体422c是以第三槽体421c的枢转位置C2为圆心的圆弧槽,在第三轴体321c运动至枢转位置C2之前,第四轴体322c不会在第四槽体422c中移动,即第二切换件402c与第二铰链件32c相对静止,那么,此时用户的作用力将驱动第二切换件402c与第二铰链件32c构成的第一整体相对第一切换件401c与第一铰链件31c构成的第二整体运动,即此时第二切换件402c相对第一切换件401c运动。
这里,位于第二切换件402c处的通孔4026c、第一下槽体414c及第五槽体417c均呈椭圆形且相互平行,在门体20c处于由第一开启角度α1继续开启至第二开启角度α2的过程中时,第二切换件402c相对第一切换件401c运动,第一轴体311c由第一下槽体414c的第一端B1运动至第二端B2,第三轴体321c由通孔4026c的初始位置A1运动至停止位置A2,第三轴体321c也由第三槽体421c的起始位置C1运动至枢转位置C2,第五轴体50c由第五槽体417c的第三端E1运动至第四端E2,换个角度讲,此时第二切换件402c相对第一切换件401c产生了一段距离的运动,而第二切换件402c及第二铰链件32c均与门体20c相对静止,相当于此时门体20c相对箱体10c产生了一段距离的运动,具体是门体20c由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动,避免门体20c与周边的橱柜或墙体等产生干涉。
这里,侧棱23c运动至位于外侧面13c靠近容纳腔室S的一侧,也就是说,此时铰链组件30c驱动侧棱23c朝靠近容纳腔室S的一侧移动,在门体20c打开过程中,可以避免因侧棱23c凸伸出外侧面13c而与周边的橱柜或墙体等产生干涉。
需要强调的是,本实施方式中的通孔4026c、第一下槽体414c及第五槽体417c均呈椭圆形且相互平行,当门体20c处于由第一开启角度α1继续开启至第二开启角度α2的过程中时,第二切换件402c实质是相对第一切换件401c产生平移而驱动门体20c相对箱体10c平移,但在其他实施方式中,通孔4026c、第一下槽体414c及第五槽体417c也可呈其他形态,例如通孔4026c、第一下槽体414c及第五槽体417c呈弧形,第二切换件402c相对第一切换件401c转动而驱动门体20c相对箱体10c转动,并在转动过程中门体20c由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动一定距离。
另外,当门体20c处于由第一开启角度α1继续开启至第二开启角度α2的过程中时,第五卡合部4032c与第六卡合部404c逐渐靠近直至第六卡合部404c限位于第五卡合部4032c而限制第一切换件401c与第二切换件402c相对运动。
具体的,在该开启过程中,第二切换件402c相对第一切换件401c运动而带动第六卡合部404c脱离第四卡合部4031c,而后第一切换件401c靠近第二切换件402c的底面抵接第六凸台4041c而驱动第六弹性件4041c压缩,且当 第六凸台4041c接触第五卡合部4032c时,第六弹性件4041c复位而带动第六凸台4041c进入第五卡合部4032c。
结合图92至图96,当门体20c处于由第二开启角度α2继续开启至最大开启角度α3的过程中时,第一铰链件31c、第一切换件401c及第二切换件402c相对静止,第二铰链件32c相对第二切换件402c运动,第三轴体321c保持在停止位置A2及枢转位置C2,第四轴体322c由转动起始位置D1运动至转动停止位置D2,门体20c相对箱体10c继续原地转动。
这里,当门体20c处于由第二开启角度α2继续开启至最大开启角度α3的过程中时,第一轴体311c保持在第一下槽体414c的第二端B2,第三轴体321c保持在停止位置A2及枢转位置C2,第五轴体50c保持在第五槽体417c的第四端E2,第四轴体322c由转动起始位置D1运动至转动停止位置D2,如此,可实现门体20c相对箱体10c继续原地转动。
具体的,当门体20c开启至第二开启角度α2时,第一切换件401c与第二切换件402c相对静止,且第一切换件401c与第一铰链件31c相对静止,此时用户继续开启门体20c时,仅能是第二铰链件32c相对第二切换件402c运动,且此时第三轴体321c位于枢转位置C2,第四轴体322c位于第四槽体422c的转动起始位置D1,第四槽体422c是圆心为第三槽体421c的枢转位置C2的圆弧槽,用户继续开启门体20c时会使得第三轴体321c保持在枢转位置C2,而第四轴体322c由第四槽体422c的转动起始位置D1运动至转动停止位置D2,在该开启过程中门体20c相对箱体10c继续原地转动。
可以看到,本实施方式可以有效控制第一铰链件31c及第二铰链件32c的顺序切换,使得门体20c可稳定开启,且可使得冰箱100c适应嵌入式应用场景。
可以理解的,门体20c的闭合过程为门体20c开启过程的逆操作。
需要说明的是,当门体20c开启至最大开启角度α3时,第一切换件401c与第二切换件402c之间通过第六卡合部404c与第五卡合部4032c实现相互限位,第六卡合部404c脱离第五卡合部4032c所需的作用力为第一作用力,第一切换件401c与第一铰链件31c之间通过第三卡合部405c与第二卡合部316c实现相互限位,第三卡合部405c脱离第二卡合部316c所需的作用力为第二作用力,实际操作中,可通过结构设置控制第一作用力及第二作用力的大小,较佳的,第一作用力小于第二作用力,如此,可使得门体20c在闭合过程中先实现第二切换件402c与第一切换件401c的复位,而后实现第一切换件401c与第一铰链件31c的复位,当然,在其他实施方式中,也可通过其他方式控制闭合过程中的复位顺序。
在本实施方式中,当门体20c处于第一开启角度α1时,通孔4026c的初始位置A1相较于停止位置A2远离箱体10c的外侧面13c,换句话说,第三轴体321c的中心与侧棱23c之间为第四间距,第三轴体321c的中心与侧壁22c之间为第六间距,当门体20c处于由第一开启角度α1c继续开启至第二开启角度α2的过程中时,第四间距及第六间距均呈减小趋势,也就是说,在门体20c处于由第一开启角度α1继续开启至第二开启角度α2的过程中时,第二切换件402c相对第一切换件401c运动,第三轴体321c于通孔4026c及第三槽体421c内运动而使得第三轴体321c的中心与侧棱23c、侧壁22c之间的间距发生变化,这里,第四间距及第六间距的变化体现为门体20c由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动一段距离,如此,可避免门体20c在打开过程中与周边的橱柜或墙体等产生干涉。
另外,当门体20c处于第一开启角度α1时,通孔4026c的初始位置A1相较于停止位置A2远离前端面103c,换句话说,第三轴体321c的中心与前壁21c之间为第五间距,当门体20c处于由第一开启角度α1继续开启至第二开启角度α2的过程中时,第五间距呈增大趋势,这里,第五间距的变化体现为门体20c朝远离箱体10c的前端面103c的方向移动一段距离,如此,当门体20c靠近箱体10c的一侧设置有门封时,可避免门体20c在打开过程中挤压门封,从而避免损坏门封,提高门封的密封效果,当然,在其他实施方式中,第五间距也可保持不变。
本发明的第一轴体311c与第三轴体321c相互错开,如此,可适用于嵌入式橱柜或容纳冰箱100c的空间较小的场景。
本实施方式的铰链组件30c及工作原理的其他说明可以参考其他实施方式,在此不再赘述。
在本实施方式中,结合图97至图101,冰箱100为带有走线模块60的冰箱100。
走线模块60包括相对设置的固定端61及自由端62,固定端61连接门体20,自由端62可活动地设置于箱体10,箱体10的走线E依次经过自由端62及固定端61而延伸至门体20。
这里,“自由端62可活动地设置于箱体10”是指自由端62与箱体10之间不固定,随着门体20开启,自由端62可相对箱体10运动,进而使得位于走线模块60中的走线E也可随着门体20开启自由活动。
需要说明的是,随着冰箱100的智能化及多功能化,冰箱100门体20上通常会设置一些功能模块,例如制冰模块、显示模块等等,该些模块通常需要通过走线E与箱体10中的控制模块连接,本实施方式的走线E通过走线模块60延伸至门体20,可有效避免在门体20开闭过程中出现走线E被拉扯的现象,且可适应各种运动轨迹的门 体20,例如当铰链组件30驱动门体20由枢转侧P朝向容纳腔室S移动时,走线E的延伸轨迹也会发生变化,本实施方式通过走线模块60的设计可完全适应门体20的这种移动,即可通过走线模块60灵活调节走线E的延伸轨迹,避免卡线。
在本实施方式中,冰箱100还包括限位空间101,限位空间101包括朝向门体20设置的槽口1011,走线模块60的固定端61穿过槽口1011而连接门体20,当门体20处于打开过程中时,门体20带动走线模块60于限位空间101内运动,且自由端62始终位于限位空间101内。
这里,限位空间101位于箱体10的顶部11,走线模块60平行于箱体10的顶部11设置,且固定端61活动连接门体20,当然,限位空间101也可设置于其他区域。
具体的,在本实施方式中,走线模块60包括第一壳体601及第二壳体602,第二壳体602邻近箱体10的顶部11设置,第一壳体601相对第二壳体602远离箱体10的顶部11,第一壳体601及第二壳体602相互配合形成容纳走线E的容纳腔体603,容纳腔体603的两端开口为固定端61及自由端62。
门体20朝上方凸伸出箱体10的顶部11,顶部11靠近门体20的边缘设有凸伸出顶部11的止挡111,止挡111处开设有槽口1011,冰箱100包括凸伸出顶部11的若干突出部112,若干突出部112围设形成限位空间101。
这里,第一铰链件31固定于顶部11的边缘位置,且为了适应门体20凸伸出顶部11的设计,铰链组件30的第一铰链件31大致呈Z型,如此,第一铰链件31可由箱体10顶部11延伸至门体20的顶部而与位于门体20顶部的切换组件40相互适配,而若干突出部112包括位于第一铰链件31与走线模块60之间的第一突出部1121及与第一突出部1121间隔设置的第二突出部1122,第一突出部1121可避免走线模块60与第一铰链件31相互干扰,且第一突出部1121的轮廓与走线模块60的运动轨迹相适应,第二突出部1122可为若干凸柱,以减小走线模块60与第二突出部1122的撞击。
冰箱100还可以包括罩体103,罩体103位于顶部11并覆盖限位空间101、第一铰链件31等等,罩体103可与止挡111相互适配,且罩体103的形状可根据具体需求而定。
另外,走线模块60的固定端61及槽口1011均靠近铰链组件30设置,可以理解的,在门体20开启过程中,走线模块60会暴露于门体20开启间隙内,将固定端61及槽口1011靠近铰链组件30设置,一方面,可合理控制走线模块60的运动轨迹,另一方面,可避免走线模块60影响外观及冰箱100的正常使用。
走线模块60呈水平设置并经过槽口1011延伸至门体20处,门体20内设有走线孔H,走线E从固定端61伸出并由走线孔H延伸至门体20内部,邻近走线孔H的区域C与固定端61区域枢轴连接,且门体20包括覆盖固定端61、走线孔H及区域C的盖体24,如此,便可实现走线模块60与门体20的活动连接,当门体20处于开启过程中时,门体20带动走线模块60运动,走线模块60在限位空间101内可按照不同的轨迹自由活动,也就是说,走线模块60的运动轨迹可完全适应门体20的运动轨迹,从而避免卡线。
另外,走线模块60包括圆弧段D,可进一步避免走线E在容纳腔体603内部被干扰。
需要说明的是,为了避免走线模块60的磨损及滑动噪音,可在走线模块60的第二壳体602及箱体10的顶部11之间设置缓冲部件或滑动部件等,具体可根据实际情况而定。
在本实施方式中,限位空间101的槽口1011具有第一槽口宽度,走线模块60包括位于固定端61及自由端62之间的活动部63,第一槽口宽度大于活动部63的最大宽度。
也就是说,随着门体20开启,活动部63逐渐凸伸出限位空间101,而第一槽口宽度大于活动部63的最大宽度,可避免槽口1011限制活动部63凸伸出限位空间101,且槽口1011可一定程度控制走线模块60的运动轨迹,避免走线模块60运动幅度过大而脱离限位空间101。
这里,为了进一步避免走线模块60脱离限位空间101,可将自由端62设置成弯折状,即自由端62与活动部63之间形成一夹角。
以上实施例仅用以说明本发明的技术方案而非限制,尽管参照较佳实施例对本发明进行了详细说明,例如,不同的实施例中的技术若可叠加使用以同时达到对应的效果,其方案也在本发明的保护范围内。本领域的普通技术人员应当理解,可以对本发明的技术方案进行修改或者等同替换,而不脱离本发明技术方案的精神和范围。

Claims (20)

  1. 一种嵌入式冰箱,其特征在于,包括箱体、用以打开和关闭箱体的门体以及连接箱体及门体的铰链组件,箱体包括容纳腔室及连接铰链组件的枢转侧,所述铰链组件包括第一铰链件、第二铰链件以及连接所述第一铰链件及所述第二铰链件的切换组件,当所述门体处于开启过程中时,所述第一铰链件先相对所述切换组件运动,而后所述第二铰链件相对所述切换组件运动,其中,所述铰链组件先驱动所述门体相对所述箱体原地转动,再驱动所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动,而后再驱动所述门体相对所述箱体继续原地转动。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的嵌入式冰箱,其特征在于,所述门体上设有第一配合部,所述箱体上设有第二配合部,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第一配合部与所述第二配合部相互卡合,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述门体相对所述箱体原地转动而带动所述第一配合部脱离所述第二配合部。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的嵌入式冰箱,其特征在于,所述门体包括枢轴连接所述箱体且沿水平方向并排设置的第一门体及第二门体,所述冰箱还包括活动连接于所述第一门体靠近所述第二门体一侧的竖梁,所述第一配合部设置于所述竖梁处,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述竖梁延伸至所述第二门体处,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述门体相对所述箱体原地转动而使得所述竖梁朝靠近所述容纳腔室的一侧转动,所述第一门体与所述竖梁之间具有第一折叠角度,而后所述竖梁与所述第一门体保持相对静止。
  4. 根据权利要求1所述的嵌入式冰箱,其特征在于,所述冰箱还包括将所述容纳腔室分隔为第一间室及第二间室的固定梁,所述门体包括对应所述第一间室设置的第一门体及对应所述第二间室设置的第二门体,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第一门体及所述第二门体均与所述固定梁接触,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述门体相对所述箱体原地转动而使得所述门体脱离所述固定梁。
  5. 根据权利要求1所述的嵌入式冰箱,其特征在于,所述第一铰链件固定于所述箱体,所述第二铰链件固定于所述门体,所述切换组件包括第一配合件及第二配合件,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一铰链件与所述第一配合件相对运动而驱动所述门体相对所述箱体原地转动,而后所述第一铰链件与所述第一配合件相对运动而驱动所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动,且所述第二配合件限位所述第二铰链件,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第二铰链件脱离所述第二配合件的限位,且所述第一配合件限位所述第一铰链件,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第二铰链件与所述第二配合件相对运动而驱动所述门体继续原地转动。
  6. 根据权利要求1所述的嵌入式冰箱,其特征在于,所述第一铰链件固定于所述箱体,所述第二铰链件固定于所述门体,所述切换组件包括第一配合件及第二配合件,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一铰链件与所述第一配合件相对运动而驱动所述门体相对所述箱体原地转动,且所述第二配合件限位所述第二铰链件,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第二铰链件脱离所述第二配合件的限位,且所述第一配合件限位所述第一铰链件,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第二铰链件与所述第二配合件相对运动而驱动所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动,而后所述第二铰链件与所述第二配合件相对运动而驱动所述门体继续原地转动。
  7. 根据权利要求5或6所述的嵌入式冰箱,其特征在于,所述切换组件包括相互配合的第一切换件及第二切换件,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中或是处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件与所述第二切换件相对静止,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件相对所述第二切换件运动而使得所述第二铰链件脱离所述第二配合件的限位,且所述第一配合件限位所述第一铰链件。
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的嵌入式冰箱,其特征在于,所述第一铰链件与所述第一配合件之间通过相互配合的第一轴体组及第一槽体组实现相对运动,所述第二铰链件与所述第二配合件之间通过相互配合的第二轴体组及第二槽体组实现相对运动,所述第一轴体组包括第一轴体及第二轴体,所述第一槽体组包括与所述第一轴体配合的第一槽体及与所述第二轴体配合的第二槽体,所述第二轴体组包括第三轴体及第四轴体,所述第二槽体组包括与所述第三轴体配合的第三槽体及与所述第四轴体配合的第四槽体。
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的嵌入式冰箱,其特征在于,所述第一铰链件包括所述第一轴体及所述第二轴体,所述第一配合件包括所述第一槽体及所述第二槽体,所述第二配合件包括所述第三轴体及所述第四轴体,所述第二铰 链件包括所述第三槽体及所述第四槽体,所述第一槽体包括位于所述第一切换件的第一上槽体及位于所述第二切换件的第一下槽体,所述第一上槽体包括第一上自由段,所述第一下槽体包括第一下自由段,所述第二槽体包括位于所述第一切换件的第二上槽体及位于所述第二切换件的第二下槽体,所述第二上槽体包括第二上自由段,所述第二下槽体包括第二下自由段,所述第三槽体包括第三自由段,所述第四槽体包括第四自由段,所述第一槽体组包括锁止段,所述第二槽体组包括限位段,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件与所述第二切换件相对静止,所述第一上自由段与所述第一下自由段重合形成第一自由段,所述第二上自由段与所述第二下自由段重合形成第二自由段,所述第一轴体于所述第一自由段运动,所述第二轴体于所述第二自由段运动,所述第三轴体和/或所述第四轴体限位于所述限位段而使得所述切换组件限位所述第二铰链件,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件及所述第二切换件相对运动而使得所述第四轴体脱离所述限位段,且所述第一轴体和/或所述第二轴体限位于所述锁止段而使得所述切换组件限位所述第一铰链件,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体于所述第三自由段内运动,所述第四轴体于所述第四自由段运动。
  10. 根据权利要求9所述的嵌入式冰箱,其特征在于,所述锁止段包括位于所述第一上槽体的第一上锁止段、位于所述第一下槽体的第一下锁止段、位于所述第二上槽体的第二上锁止段及位于所述第二下槽体的第二下锁止段,所述限位段包括位于所述第四槽体的第四限位段,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第四轴体限位于所述第四限位段,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体同时限位于所述第一上锁止段及所述第一下锁止段,所述第二轴体同时限位于所述第二上锁止段及所述第二下锁止段,且所述第四轴体脱离所述第四限位段。
  11. 根据权利要求9所述的嵌入式冰箱,其特征在于,所述第一自由段包括相对设置的初始位置及停止位置,所述第二自由段包括相连的第一段及第二段,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第一轴体位于所述初始位置,所述第二轴体位于所述第一段远离所述第二段的一端,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体于所述初始位置原地转动,所述第二轴体以所述第一轴体为圆心而于所述第一段内运动,而后所述第二轴体于所述第二段内运动而带动所述第一轴体由所述初始位置运动至所述停止位置,所述门体由容纳腔室朝向枢转侧移动,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体于所述第三自由段内原地转动,所述第四轴体以所述第三轴体为圆心而于所述第四自由段运动。
  12. 根据权利要求9所述的嵌入式冰箱,其特征在于,所述第三自由段包括相对设置的起始位置及枢转位置,所述第四自由段包括相连的移动段及转动段,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第二轴体位于所述第二自由段的一端,所述第三轴体位于所述起始位置,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体于所述第一自由段内原地转动,所述第二轴体以所述第一轴体为圆心而于所述第二自由段内运动,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第四轴体于所述移动段内运动而带动所述第三轴体由所述起始位置运动至所述枢转位置,所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动,而后所述第三轴体于所述枢转位置原地转动,所述第四轴体以所述第三轴体为圆心而于所述转动段运动。
  13. 根据权利要求9所述的嵌入式冰箱,其特征在于,所述箱体包括开口及环绕所述开口设置的前端面,所述第一轴体与所述前端面之间具有第一距离,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体与所述前端面之间具有第二距离,所述第二距离大于所述第一距离,所述嵌入式冰箱还包括邻近铰链组件且在门体转动路径延伸段上的外侧面,所述第一轴体与所述外侧面之间具有第三距离,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体与所述外侧面之间具有第四距离,所述第四距离小于所述第三距离。
  14. 一种嵌入式冰箱,其特征在于,包括箱体、用以打开和关闭箱体的门体以及连接箱体及门体的铰链组件,箱体包括容纳腔室及连接铰链组件的枢转侧,所述铰链组件包括固定于所述箱体的第一铰链件、固定于所述门体的第二铰链件以及连接所述第一铰链件及所述第二铰链件的切换组件,所述第一铰链件与所述切换组件之间通过相互配合的第一轴体及第一槽体实现相对运动,所述第一槽体包括第一自由段,所述第二铰链件与所述切换组件之间通过相互配合的第二轴体组及第二槽体组实现相对运动,所述第二轴体组包括第三轴体及第四轴体,所述第二槽体组包括第三自由段、第四自由段及限位段,所述第三自由段包括相对设置的起始位置及枢转位置,所述第四自由段包括依次相连的移动段及转动段,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第一轴体位于所述第一自由段,所 述第四轴体位于所述限位段而使得所述切换组件限位所述第二铰链件,所述第三轴体位于所述起始位置,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体于所述第一自由段内原地转动而带动所述门体相对所述箱体原地转动,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第四轴体脱离所述限位段,所述第三轴体保持在所述起始位置,所述切换组件限位所述第一铰链件,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第四轴体于所述移动段内运动而带动所述第三轴体由所述起始位置运动至所述枢转位置,所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动,而后所述第三轴体于所述枢转位置原地转动,所述第四轴体以所述第三轴体为圆心而于所述转动段运动,所述门体相对所述箱体继续原地转动。
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的嵌入式冰箱,其特征在于,所述第一铰链件包括所述第一轴体,所述切换组件包括所述第一槽体、所述第三轴体及所述第四轴体,所述第二铰链件包括具有所述第三自由段的第三槽体及具有所述第四自由段、所述限位段的第四槽体,所述切换组件包括相互配合的第一切换件及第二切换件,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中或是处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件与所述第二切换件相对静止,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件相对所述第二切换件运动而使得所述第四轴体脱离所述限位段。
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的嵌入式冰箱,其特征在于,所述第一铰链件包括第一限位部,所述第一切换件包括第二限位部,所述第一槽体包括位于所述第一切换件的第一上槽体及位于所述第二切换件的第一下槽体,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一上槽体与所述第一下槽体之间的重合部分为第一自由段,所述第一轴体于所述第一自由段内原地转动,所述第二限位部抵接所述第一限位部而使得所述切换组件限位所述第一铰链件,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件相对所述第二切换件运动而使得所述第四轴体脱离所述限位段。
  17. 一种嵌入式冰箱,其特征在于,包括箱体、用以打开和关闭所述箱体的门体以及连接所述箱体及所述门体的铰链组件,所述箱体包括容纳腔室及连接所述铰链组件的枢转侧,所述铰链组件包括固定于所述箱体的第一铰链件、固定于所述门体的第二铰链件以及连接所述第一铰链件及所述第二铰链件的切换组件,所述切换组件包括相互配合的第一切换件及第二切换件,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件、所述第二切换件及所述第二铰链件相对静止并一起相对所述第一铰链件运动,所述门体相对所述箱体原地转动,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一切换件与所述第一铰链件相对静止,所述第二切换件与所述第二铰链件相对静止并一起相对所述第一切换件运动,所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第一铰链件、所述第一切换件及所述第二切换件相对静止,所述第二铰链件相对所述第二切换件运动,所述门体相对所述箱体继续原地转动。
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的嵌入式冰箱,其特征在于,所述第一铰链件包括第一轴体,所述第一切换件包括第三轴体及第一上槽体,所述第二切换件包括第四轴体及通孔,所述第二铰链件包括第三槽体及第四槽体,所述通孔包括相对设置的初始位置及停止位置,所述第三槽体包括相对设置的起始位置及枢转位置,所述第四槽体包括相对设置的转动起始位置及转动停止位置,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第一轴体延伸至所述第一上槽体,所述第三轴体依次穿过所述通孔及所述第三槽体,且所述第三轴体位于所述初始位置及所述起始位置,所述第四轴体位于所述第四槽体的所述转动起始位置,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体于所述第一上槽体内原地转动而带动所述门体相对所述箱体原地转动,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第四轴体保持在所述转动起始位置,所述第三轴体由所述初始位置运动至所述停止位置,同时所述第三轴体由所述起始位置运动至所述枢转位置,所述门体由枢转侧朝向容纳腔室移动,当所述门体处于由第二开启角度继续开启至最大开启角度的过程中时,所述第三轴体保持在所述停止位置及所述枢转位置,所述第四轴体由所述转动起始位置运动至所述转动停止位置,所述门体相对所述箱体继续原地转动。
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的嵌入式冰箱,其特征在于,所述第二切换件包括第一下槽体,所述第一轴体依次穿过所述第一上槽体及所述第一下槽体,所述第一下槽体包括相对设置的第一端及第二端,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体保持在所述第一端,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第一轴体由所述第一端运动至所述第二端。
  20. 根据权利要求17所述的嵌入式冰箱,其特征在于,所述第一铰链件包括第一限位部,所述第一切换件包括第二限位部,所述第一限位部及所述第二限位部的其中之一为凸块,其中另一为凹陷部,所述凸块包括第一限位面,所述凹陷部包括第二限位面,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第一限位面远离所述第二限位面,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第一限位面与所述第二限位面逐渐靠近直至所述第一限位面抵接所述第二限位面,所述第一铰链件包括第一卡合部及第二卡合部,所述第一切换件包括第三卡合部,当所述门体处于关闭状态时,所述第三卡合部限位于所述第一卡合部,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第三卡合部脱离所述第一卡合部,且所述第三卡合部与所述第二卡合部逐渐靠近直至所述第三卡合部限位于所述第二卡合部,所述第一切换件包括第四卡合部及第五卡合部,所述第二切换件包括第六卡合部,当所述门体处于由关闭状态开启至第一开启角度的过程中时,所述第六卡合部限位于所述第四卡合部,当所述门体处于由第一开启角度继续开启至第二开启角度的过程中时,所述第六卡合部脱离所述第四卡合部,且所述第六卡合部与所述第五卡合部逐渐靠近直至所述第六卡合部限位于所述第五卡合部。
PCT/CN2020/111633 2019-08-28 2020-08-27 嵌入式冰箱 WO2021037117A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU2020339538A AU2020339538B2 (en) 2019-08-28 2020-08-27 Embedded refrigerator
EP20856322.1A EP4023975A4 (en) 2019-08-28 2020-08-27 EMBEDDED REFRIGERATOR
US17/638,805 US20220325940A1 (en) 2019-08-28 2020-08-27 Embedded refrigerator
JP2022513886A JP2022546510A (ja) 2019-08-28 2020-08-27 ビルトイン式冷蔵庫

Applications Claiming Priority (12)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201910803437.1A CN112444073B (zh) 2019-08-28 2019-08-28 嵌入式多门冰箱
CN201910803425.9A CN112444068B (zh) 2019-08-28 2019-08-28 嵌入式对开门冰箱
CN201910803425.9 2019-08-28
CN201910803437.1 2019-08-28
CN201910804444 2019-08-28
CN201910804444.3 2019-08-28
CN201910803434.8 2019-08-28
CN201910803434.8A CN112444072B (zh) 2019-08-28 2019-08-28 嵌入式冰箱
CN202010179561.8A CN112444092B (zh) 2019-08-28 2020-03-16 嵌入式冰箱
CN202010179561.8 2020-03-16
CN202010637425.9 2020-07-03
CN202010637425.9A CN113882769B (zh) 2020-07-03 2020-07-03 门体旋转轴可变的嵌入式冰箱

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021037117A1 true WO2021037117A1 (zh) 2021-03-04

Family

ID=74684587

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/111633 WO2021037117A1 (zh) 2019-08-28 2020-08-27 嵌入式冰箱

Country Status (5)

Country Link
US (1) US20220325940A1 (zh)
EP (1) EP4023975A4 (zh)
JP (1) JP2022546510A (zh)
AU (1) AU2020339538B2 (zh)
WO (1) WO2021037117A1 (zh)

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN114961484B (zh) * 2019-07-23 2023-11-14 青岛海尔电冰箱有限公司 铰链组件及具有其的制冷设备

Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3065498A (en) * 1959-12-11 1962-11-27 Jervis Corp Hinge device
AU431315B2 (en) * 1966-08-31 1972-12-28 Improvements in and relating to windows and hinges therefor
GB2128244B (en) * 1982-09-14 1985-11-13 Tokyo Shibaura Electric Co Door hinge device for a repository
US5265954A (en) * 1989-02-21 1993-11-30 Whirlpool Corporation Refrigerator door hinge assembly
JP2013256829A (ja) * 2012-06-13 2013-12-26 Hitoshi Nishitani ヒンジ装置
CN108106312A (zh) * 2017-12-12 2018-06-01 青岛海尔股份有限公司 冰箱
CN109470019A (zh) * 2016-08-05 2019-03-15 青岛海尔股份有限公司 冰箱

Family Cites Families (17)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US1075130A (en) * 1912-09-28 1913-10-07 Edward L Ackerman Concealed hinge.
US1832174A (en) * 1930-06-24 1931-11-17 Edward J Zahner Frame with opening and closure therefor
US2793387A (en) * 1955-08-22 1957-05-28 Albert W Odell Pivotal connection
US3001225A (en) * 1958-01-10 1961-09-26 Admiral Corp Dual pivot freezer hinge
US5158503A (en) * 1990-11-21 1992-10-27 White Consolidated Industries, Inc. Double-pivot door hinge for appliance doors
JP3143246B2 (ja) * 1992-12-28 2001-03-07 三洋電機株式会社 業務用冷蔵庫
KR100443983B1 (ko) * 2002-01-15 2004-08-09 삼성전자주식회사 냉장고
JP3756909B2 (ja) * 2003-11-14 2006-03-22 均 西谷 ヒンジ装置
GB2439328B (en) * 2006-06-22 2012-07-04 Panasonic Mfg Uk Ltd Domestic appliance with concealed hinge
JP5372432B2 (ja) * 2008-08-21 2013-12-18 三洋電機株式会社 低温ショーケース
JP5753379B2 (ja) * 2010-12-25 2015-07-22 ハイアールアジア株式会社 冷却貯蔵庫の扉装置
JP5976296B2 (ja) * 2011-10-24 2016-08-23 パナソニック株式会社 扉の取付構造及び取付方法
JP5467139B1 (ja) * 2012-11-08 2014-04-09 日本車輌製造株式会社 折りたたみ式テーブル
JP2015135228A (ja) * 2013-10-17 2015-07-27 三星電子株式会社Samsung Electronics Co.,Ltd. ヒンジ装置、及び該ヒンジ装置を備えた冷却貯蔵庫
KR101622008B1 (ko) * 2013-11-21 2016-05-17 동부대우전자 주식회사 냉장고용 중앙 격벽 밀착구조 및 이를 구비한 냉장고
US9995528B1 (en) * 2017-10-12 2018-06-12 Whirlpool Corporation Refrigerator having a camera selectively enclosed by a rotating mullion assembly
CN108286860B (zh) * 2017-12-12 2020-09-29 青岛海尔股份有限公司 冰箱

Patent Citations (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3065498A (en) * 1959-12-11 1962-11-27 Jervis Corp Hinge device
AU431315B2 (en) * 1966-08-31 1972-12-28 Improvements in and relating to windows and hinges therefor
GB2128244B (en) * 1982-09-14 1985-11-13 Tokyo Shibaura Electric Co Door hinge device for a repository
US5265954A (en) * 1989-02-21 1993-11-30 Whirlpool Corporation Refrigerator door hinge assembly
JP2013256829A (ja) * 2012-06-13 2013-12-26 Hitoshi Nishitani ヒンジ装置
CN109470019A (zh) * 2016-08-05 2019-03-15 青岛海尔股份有限公司 冰箱
CN108106312A (zh) * 2017-12-12 2018-06-01 青岛海尔股份有限公司 冰箱

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP4023975A4

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP2022546510A (ja) 2022-11-04
AU2020339538A1 (en) 2022-03-24
AU2020339538B2 (en) 2023-06-01
EP4023975A4 (en) 2022-10-19
US20220325940A1 (en) 2022-10-13
EP4023975A1 (en) 2022-07-06

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021037121A1 (zh) 可增加开度的自由嵌入式冰箱
WO2021037096A1 (zh) 带有可切换铰链组件的冰箱
WO2021037095A1 (zh) 带有可活动铰链组件的冰箱
WO2021037110A1 (zh) 自由嵌入式冰箱
WO2021037098A1 (zh) 带有走线模块的冰箱
CN112444063B (zh) 可增加开度的自由嵌入式冰箱
WO2021037097A1 (zh) 嵌入式冰箱
WO2021037120A1 (zh) 可辅助开门的嵌入式冰箱
WO2021037119A1 (zh) 带有切换组件的嵌入式冰箱
CN115110860A (zh) 铰链组件及具有其的冰箱
CN114876300A (zh) 铰链组件及具有其的制冷装置
WO2021037117A1 (zh) 嵌入式冰箱
CN112444072B (zh) 嵌入式冰箱
CN112444073B (zh) 嵌入式多门冰箱
CN112444080B (zh) 可增加开度的多门冰箱
CN112444057B (zh) 可实现重心内移的多门冰箱
CN112444089B (zh) 可增加开度的自由嵌入式冰箱
WO2021037123A1 (zh) 可实现重心内移的嵌入式冰箱
CN112444070B (zh) 可辅助开门的多门冰箱
CN115012753A (zh) 铰链组件及具有其的制冷器具
WO2021037104A1 (zh) 带有多轴铰链组件的冰箱
WO2021037103A1 (zh) 带有切换组件的冰箱
CN112444085B (zh) 带有切换组件的嵌入式多门冰箱
WO2021037108A1 (zh) 可实现重心内移的冰箱
WO2021037105A1 (zh) 可辅助开门的冰箱

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20856322

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2022513886

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2020339538

Country of ref document: AU

Date of ref document: 20200827

Kind code of ref document: A

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2020856322

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20220328